1 |
GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2002-12-08 |
2 |
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
3 |
See the end for copying conditions. |
4 |
|
5 |
Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org. |
6 |
For older news, see the file ONEWS |
7 |
|
8 |
|
9 |
* Installation changes in Emacs 21.3 |
10 |
|
11 |
** Support for GNU/Linux on little-endian MIPS and on IBM S390 has |
12 |
been added. |
13 |
|
14 |
|
15 |
* Changes in Emacs 21.3 |
16 |
|
17 |
** The obsolete C mode (c-mode.el) has been removed to avoid problems |
18 |
with Custom. |
19 |
|
20 |
** UTF-16 coding systems are available, encoding the same characters |
21 |
as mule-utf-8. Coding system `utf-16-le-dos' is useful as the value |
22 |
of `selection-coding-system' in MS Windows, allowing you to paste |
23 |
multilingual text from the clipboard. Set it interactively with |
24 |
C-x RET x or in .emacs with `(set-selection-coding-system 'utf-16-le-dos)'. |
25 |
|
26 |
** There is a new language environment for UTF-8 (set up automatically |
27 |
in UTF-8 locales). |
28 |
|
29 |
** Translation tables are available between equivalent characters in |
30 |
different Emacs charsets -- for instance `e with acute' coming from the |
31 |
Latin-1 and Latin-2 charsets. User options `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' |
32 |
and `unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' respectively turn on translation |
33 |
between ISO 8859 character sets (`unification') on encoding |
34 |
(e.g. writing a file) and decoding (e.g. reading a file). Note that |
35 |
`unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is useful and safe, but |
36 |
`unify-8859-on-decoding-mode' can cause text to change when you read |
37 |
it and write it out again without edits, so it is not generally advisable. |
38 |
By default `unify-8859-on-encoding-mode' is turned on. |
39 |
|
40 |
** In Emacs running on the X window system, the default value of |
41 |
`selection-coding-system' is now `compound-text-with-extensions'. |
42 |
|
43 |
If you want the old behavior, set selection-coding-system to |
44 |
compound-text, which may be significantly more efficient. Using |
45 |
compound-text-with-extensions seems to be necessary only for decoding |
46 |
text from applications under XFree86 4.2, whose behaviour is actually |
47 |
contrary to the compound text specification. |
48 |
|
49 |
|
50 |
* Installation changes in Emacs 21.2 |
51 |
|
52 |
** Support for BSD/OS 5.0 has been added. |
53 |
|
54 |
** Support for AIX 5.1 was added. |
55 |
|
56 |
|
57 |
* Changes in Emacs 21.2 |
58 |
|
59 |
** Emacs now supports compound-text extended segments in X selections. |
60 |
|
61 |
X applications can use `extended segments' to encode characters in |
62 |
compound text that belong to character sets which are not part of the |
63 |
list of approved standard encodings for X, e.g. Big5. To paste |
64 |
selections with such characters into Emacs, use the new coding system |
65 |
compound-text-with-extensions as the value of selection-coding-system. |
66 |
|
67 |
** The default values of `tooltip-delay' and `tooltip-hide-delay' |
68 |
were changed. |
69 |
|
70 |
** On terminals whose erase-char is ^H (Backspace), Emacs |
71 |
now uses normal-erase-is-backspace-mode. |
72 |
|
73 |
** When the *scratch* buffer is recreated, its mode is set from |
74 |
initial-major-mode, which normally is lisp-interaction-mode, |
75 |
instead of using default-major-mode. |
76 |
|
77 |
** The new option `Info-scroll-prefer-subnodes' causes Info to behave |
78 |
like the stand-alone Info reader (from the GNU Texinfo package) as far |
79 |
as motion between nodes and their subnodes is concerned. If it is t |
80 |
(the default), Emacs behaves as before when you type SPC in a menu: it |
81 |
visits the subnode pointed to by the first menu entry. If this option |
82 |
is nil, SPC scrolls to the end of the current node, and only then goes |
83 |
to the first menu item, like the stand-alone reader does. |
84 |
|
85 |
This change was already in Emacs 21.1, but wasn't advertised in the |
86 |
NEWS. |
87 |
|
88 |
|
89 |
* Lisp Changes in Emacs 21.2 |
90 |
|
91 |
** The meanings of scroll-up-aggressively and scroll-down-aggressively |
92 |
have been interchanged, so that the former now controls scrolling up, |
93 |
and the latter now controls scrolling down. |
94 |
|
95 |
** The variable `compilation-parse-errors-filename-function' can |
96 |
be used to transform filenames found in compilation output. |
97 |
|
98 |
|
99 |
* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
100 |
|
101 |
See the INSTALL file for information on installing extra libraries and |
102 |
fonts to take advantage of the new graphical features and extra |
103 |
charsets in this release. |
104 |
|
105 |
** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added. |
106 |
|
107 |
** Support for LynxOS has been added. |
108 |
|
109 |
** There are new configure options associated with the support for |
110 |
images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure' |
111 |
to list them. |
112 |
|
113 |
** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which |
114 |
support 64-bit executables and also on Irix 6.5. This increases the |
115 |
maximum buffer size. See etc/MACHINES for instructions. Changes to |
116 |
build on other 64-bit systems should be straightforward modulo any |
117 |
necessary changes to unexec. |
118 |
|
119 |
** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit |
120 |
Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available. |
121 |
|
122 |
** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs |
123 |
Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available. |
124 |
|
125 |
** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using |
126 |
the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary. |
127 |
|
128 |
** This version can be built for the Macintosh, but does not implement |
129 |
all of the new display features described below. The port currently |
130 |
lacks unexec, asynchronous processes, and networking support. See the |
131 |
"Emacs and the Mac OS" appendix in the Emacs manual, for the |
132 |
description of aspects specific to the Mac. |
133 |
|
134 |
** Note that the MS-Windows port does not yet implement various of the |
135 |
new display features described below. |
136 |
|
137 |
|
138 |
* Changes in Emacs 21.1 |
139 |
|
140 |
** Emacs has a new redisplay engine. |
141 |
|
142 |
The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height. |
143 |
Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing |
144 |
oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height |
145 |
of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in |
146 |
the text. |
147 |
|
148 |
** Emacs has a new face implementation. |
149 |
|
150 |
The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the |
151 |
font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family, |
152 |
height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify. |
153 |
These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together |
154 |
specify a font. |
155 |
|
156 |
Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts. |
157 |
These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found |
158 |
under Lisp changes, below. |
159 |
|
160 |
** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames. |
161 |
|
162 |
Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors. |
163 |
Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if |
164 |
the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and |
165 |
italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it. |
166 |
Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face |
167 |
attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored |
168 |
on terminals. |
169 |
|
170 |
The command-line options `-fg COLOR', `-bg COLOR', and `-rv' are now |
171 |
supported on character terminals. |
172 |
|
173 |
Emacs automatically remaps all X-style color specifications to one of |
174 |
the colors supported by the terminal. This means you could have the |
175 |
same color customizations that work both on a windowed display and on |
176 |
a TTY or when Emacs is invoked with the -nw option. |
177 |
|
178 |
** New default font is Courier 12pt under X. |
179 |
|
180 |
** Sound support |
181 |
|
182 |
Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware |
183 |
driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently |
184 |
supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au). |
185 |
You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' to enable |
186 |
sound support. |
187 |
|
188 |
** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate. |
189 |
|
190 |
If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are |
191 |
longer than one line, Emacs can resize the minibuffer window unless it |
192 |
is on a frame of its own. You can control resizing and the maximum |
193 |
minibuffer window size by setting the following variables: |
194 |
|
195 |
- User option: max-mini-window-height |
196 |
|
197 |
Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a |
198 |
fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it |
199 |
specifies a number of lines. |
200 |
|
201 |
Default is 0.25. |
202 |
|
203 |
- User option: resize-mini-windows |
204 |
|
205 |
How to resize mini-windows. If nil, don't resize. If t, always |
206 |
resize to fit the size of the text. If `grow-only', let mini-windows |
207 |
grow only, until they become empty, at which point they are shrunk |
208 |
again. |
209 |
|
210 |
Default is `grow-only'. |
211 |
|
212 |
** LessTif support. |
213 |
|
214 |
Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see |
215 |
<http://www.lesstif.org>). You will need version 0.92.26, or later. |
216 |
|
217 |
** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog. |
218 |
|
219 |
When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name |
220 |
from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is |
221 |
non-nil. |
222 |
|
223 |
** File selection dialog on MS-Windows is supported. |
224 |
|
225 |
When a file is visited by clicking File->Open, the MS-Windows version |
226 |
now pops up a standard file selection dialog where you can select a |
227 |
file to visit. File->Save As also pops up that dialog. |
228 |
|
229 |
** Toolkit scroll bars. |
230 |
|
231 |
Emacs now uses toolkit scroll bars if available. When configured for |
232 |
LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scroll bar. Otherwise, when |
233 |
configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll |
234 |
bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll |
235 |
bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring |
236 |
Emacs. |
237 |
|
238 |
When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how |
239 |
Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from |
240 |
Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your |
241 |
Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a |
242 |
define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take |
243 |
`s/freebsd.h' as an example. |
244 |
|
245 |
Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take |
246 |
a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the |
247 |
directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on |
248 |
different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your |
249 |
system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO', |
250 |
add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file. |
251 |
|
252 |
The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or |
253 |
`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO. |
254 |
This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's |
255 |
imake configuration file contains the necessary information. Since |
256 |
Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually. |
257 |
|
258 |
** Tool bar support. |
259 |
|
260 |
Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details |
261 |
of how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level |
262 |
changes. Tool-bar global minor mode controls whether or not it is |
263 |
displayed and is on by default. The appearance of the bar is improved |
264 |
if Emacs has been built with XPM image support. Otherwise monochrome |
265 |
icons will be used. |
266 |
|
267 |
To make the tool bar more useful, we need contributions of extra icons |
268 |
for specific modes (with copyright assignments). Contributions would |
269 |
also be useful to touch up some of the PBM icons manually. |
270 |
|
271 |
** Tooltips. |
272 |
|
273 |
Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current |
274 |
mouse position. The Lisp package `tooltip' implements them. You can |
275 |
turn them off via the user option `tooltip-mode'. |
276 |
|
277 |
Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated, |
278 |
variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with |
279 |
the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the |
280 |
tooltip display in the group `tooltip'. |
281 |
|
282 |
** Automatic Hscrolling |
283 |
|
284 |
Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if |
285 |
`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be |
286 |
customized. |
287 |
|
288 |
If a window is scrolled horizontally with set-window-hscroll, or |
289 |
scroll-left/scroll-right (C-x <, C-x >), this serves as a lower bound |
290 |
for automatic horizontal scrolling. Automatic scrolling will scroll |
291 |
the text more to the left if necessary, but won't scroll the text more |
292 |
to the right than the column set with set-window-hscroll etc. |
293 |
|
294 |
** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor |
295 |
of its own. By default, when a window is selected, the cursor is |
296 |
solid; otherwise, it is hollow. The user-option |
297 |
`cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to display the |
298 |
cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is shown, if |
299 |
non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. |
300 |
|
301 |
** Fringes to the left and right of windows are used to display |
302 |
truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The |
303 |
foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by |
304 |
customizing face `fringe'. |
305 |
|
306 |
** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. |
307 |
You can change its appearance by modifying the face `mode-line'. |
308 |
In particular, setting the `:box' attribute to nil turns off the 3D |
309 |
appearance of the mode line. (The 3D appearance makes the mode line |
310 |
occupy more space, and thus might cause the first or the last line of |
311 |
the window to be partially obscured.) |
312 |
|
313 |
The variable `mode-line-inverse-video', which was used in older |
314 |
versions of emacs to make the mode-line stand out, is now deprecated. |
315 |
However, setting it to nil will cause the `mode-line' face to be |
316 |
ignored, and mode-lines to be drawn using the default text face. |
317 |
|
318 |
** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
319 |
|
320 |
Different parts of the mode line have been made mouse-sensitive on all |
321 |
systems which support the mouse. Moving the mouse to a |
322 |
mouse-sensitive part in the mode line changes the appearance of the |
323 |
mouse pointer to an arrow, and help about available mouse actions is |
324 |
displayed either in the echo area, or in the tooltip window if you |
325 |
have enabled one. |
326 |
|
327 |
Currently, the following actions have been defined: |
328 |
|
329 |
- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line goes to the next buffer. |
330 |
|
331 |
- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name goes to the previous buffer. |
332 |
|
333 |
- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or |
334 |
`*') toggles the status. |
335 |
|
336 |
- Mouse-3 on the mode name displays a minor-mode menu. |
337 |
|
338 |
** Hourglass pointer |
339 |
|
340 |
Emacs can optionally display an hourglass pointer under X. You can |
341 |
turn the display on or off by customizing group `cursor'. |
342 |
|
343 |
** Blinking cursor |
344 |
|
345 |
M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on |
346 |
terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking |
347 |
and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in |
348 |
the group `cursor'. |
349 |
|
350 |
** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'. |
351 |
|
352 |
This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is |
353 |
generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification. |
354 |
See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more |
355 |
details. |
356 |
|
357 |
Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't |
358 |
have to do anything to activate it. |
359 |
|
360 |
** The default binding of the Delete key has changed. |
361 |
|
362 |
The new user-option `normal-erase-is-backspace' can be set to |
363 |
determine the effect of the Delete and Backspace function keys. |
364 |
|
365 |
On window systems, the default value of this option is chosen |
366 |
according to the keyboard used. If the keyboard has both a Backspace |
367 |
key and a Delete key, and both are mapped to their usual meanings, the |
368 |
option's default value is set to t, so that Backspace can be used to |
369 |
delete backward, and Delete can be used to delete forward. On |
370 |
keyboards which either have only one key (usually labeled DEL), or two |
371 |
keys DEL and BS which produce the same effect, the option's value is |
372 |
set to nil, and these keys delete backward. |
373 |
|
374 |
If not running under a window system, setting this option accomplishes |
375 |
a similar effect by mapping C-h, which is usually generated by the |
376 |
Backspace key, to DEL, and by mapping DEL to C-d via |
377 |
`keyboard-translate'. The former functionality of C-h is available on |
378 |
the F1 key. You should probably not use this setting on a text-only |
379 |
terminal if you don't have both Backspace, Delete and F1 keys. |
380 |
|
381 |
Programmatically, you can call function normal-erase-is-backspace-mode |
382 |
to toggle the behavior of the Delete and Backspace keys. |
383 |
|
384 |
** The default for user-option `next-line-add-newlines' has been |
385 |
changed to nil, i.e. C-n will no longer add newlines at the end of a |
386 |
buffer by default. |
387 |
|
388 |
** The <home> and <end> keys now move to the beginning or end of the |
389 |
current line, respectively. C-<home> and C-<end> move to the |
390 |
beginning and end of the buffer. |
391 |
|
392 |
** Emacs now checks for recursive loads of Lisp files. If the |
393 |
recursion depth exceeds `recursive-load-depth-limit', an error is |
394 |
signaled. |
395 |
|
396 |
** When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init |
397 |
file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer. |
398 |
|
399 |
** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't |
400 |
compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change |
401 |
this behavior. |
402 |
|
403 |
The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs's byte |
404 |
compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let |
405 |
Emacs dump core. |
406 |
|
407 |
** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus. |
408 |
|
409 |
When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit |
410 |
widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for |
411 |
Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif. |
412 |
|
413 |
** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is |
414 |
more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is |
415 |
now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus. |
416 |
|
417 |
** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set |
418 |
using that menu. |
419 |
|
420 |
** Highlighting of trailing whitespace. |
421 |
|
422 |
When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing |
423 |
whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is |
424 |
defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy |
425 |
highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not |
426 |
displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the |
427 |
whitespace. |
428 |
|
429 |
** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes |
430 |
all frames except the selected one. |
431 |
|
432 |
** The new user-option `confirm-kill-emacs' can be customized to |
433 |
let Emacs ask for confirmation before exiting. |
434 |
|
435 |
** The header line in an Info buffer is now displayed as an emacs |
436 |
header-line (which is like a mode-line, but at the top of the window), |
437 |
so that it remains visible even when the buffer has been scrolled. |
438 |
This behavior may be disabled by customizing the option |
439 |
`Info-use-header-line'. |
440 |
|
441 |
** Polish, Czech, German, and French translations of Emacs' reference card |
442 |
have been added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex', `cs-refcard.tex', |
443 |
`de-refcard.tex' and `fr-refcard.tex'. Postscript files are included. |
444 |
|
445 |
** An `Emacs Survival Guide', etc/survival.tex, is available. |
446 |
|
447 |
** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is |
448 |
`dired-ref.tex'. A French translation is available in |
449 |
`fr-drdref.tex'. |
450 |
|
451 |
** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not |
452 |
displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the |
453 |
menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode |
454 |
menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu. |
455 |
|
456 |
** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable through Customize. |
457 |
|
458 |
You can no longer use `M-x customize-variable' to customize `load-path' |
459 |
because it now contains a version-dependent component. You can still |
460 |
use `add-to-list' and `setq' to customize this variable in your |
461 |
`~/.emacs' init file or to modify it from any Lisp program in general. |
462 |
|
463 |
** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at |
464 |
point in a pop-up window. |
465 |
|
466 |
** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse) |
467 |
under XFree86. To enable this, use the `mouse-wheel-mode' command, or |
468 |
customize the variable `mouse-wheel-mode'. |
469 |
|
470 |
The variables `mouse-wheel-follow-mouse' and `mouse-wheel-scroll-amount' |
471 |
determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled. |
472 |
|
473 |
** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a |
474 |
sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory. |
475 |
(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.) |
476 |
You can customize `auto-save-list-file-prefix' to change this location. |
477 |
|
478 |
** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively. |
479 |
|
480 |
** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
481 |
to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. |
482 |
|
483 |
** The new command M-x delete-trailing-whitespace RET will delete the |
484 |
trailing whitespace within the current restriction. You can also add |
485 |
this function to `write-file-hooks' or `local-write-file-hooks'. |
486 |
|
487 |
** When visiting a file with M-x find-file-literally, no newlines will |
488 |
be added to the end of the buffer even if `require-final-newline' is |
489 |
non-nil. |
490 |
|
491 |
** The new user-option `find-file-suppress-same-file-warnings' can be |
492 |
set to suppress warnings ``X and Y are the same file'' when visiting a |
493 |
file that is already visited under a different name. |
494 |
|
495 |
** The new user-option `electric-help-shrink-window' can be set to |
496 |
nil to prevent adjusting the help window size to the buffer size. |
497 |
|
498 |
** New command M-x describe-character-set reads a character set name |
499 |
and displays information about that. |
500 |
|
501 |
** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular |
502 |
expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination. |
503 |
|
504 |
This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to |
505 |
determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a |
506 |
mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be |
507 |
interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the |
508 |
regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode |
509 |
associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'. |
510 |
|
511 |
** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is |
512 |
suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'. |
513 |
|
514 |
** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if |
515 |
buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer |
516 |
contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or |
517 |
by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and |
518 |
insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment, |
519 |
the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding. |
520 |
Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system. |
521 |
|
522 |
** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have |
523 |
been removed -- use `set-language-environment'. |
524 |
|
525 |
** The new Custom option `keyboard-coding-system' specifies a coding |
526 |
system for keyboard input. |
527 |
|
528 |
** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs' |
529 |
coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's |
530 |
escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores |
531 |
such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is |
532 |
recommended not to change it except for the special case that you |
533 |
always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to |
534 |
read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c |
535 |
(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1 |
536 |
RET C-x C-f filename RET. |
537 |
|
538 |
** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the |
539 |
environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'. |
540 |
|
541 |
** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and |
542 |
displays all characters in that character set. |
543 |
|
544 |
** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based |
545 |
coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8. |
546 |
|
547 |
** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment |
548 |
and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the |
549 |
LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup. |
550 |
|
551 |
** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'. |
552 |
Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets |
553 |
8859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). |
554 |
GNU Intlfonts doesn't support these yet but recent X releases have |
555 |
8859-15. See etc/INSTALL for information on obtaining extra fonts. |
556 |
There are new Leim input methods for Latin-8 and Latin-9 prefix (only) |
557 |
and Polish `slash'. |
558 |
|
559 |
** New language environments `Dutch' and `Spanish'. |
560 |
These new environments mainly select appropriate translations |
561 |
of the tutorial. |
562 |
|
563 |
** In Ethiopic language environment, special key bindings for |
564 |
function keys are changed as follows. This is to conform to "Emacs |
565 |
Lisp Coding Convention". |
566 |
|
567 |
new command old-binding |
568 |
--- ------- ----------- |
569 |
f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-buffer f5 |
570 |
S-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-region f5 |
571 |
C-f3 ethio-fidel-to-sera-mail-or-marker f5 |
572 |
|
573 |
f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-buffer unchanged |
574 |
S-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-region unchanged |
575 |
C-f4 ethio-sera-to-fidel-mail-or-marker unchanged |
576 |
|
577 |
S-f5 ethio-toggle-punctuation f3 |
578 |
S-f6 ethio-modify-vowel f6 |
579 |
S-f7 ethio-replace-space f7 |
580 |
S-f8 ethio-input-special-character f8 |
581 |
S-f9 ethio-replace-space unchanged |
582 |
C-f9 ethio-toggle-space f2 |
583 |
|
584 |
** There are new Leim input methods. |
585 |
New input methods "turkish-postfix", "turkish-alt-postfix", |
586 |
"greek-mizuochi", "TeX", and "greek-babel" are now part of the Leim |
587 |
package. |
588 |
|
589 |
** The rule of input method "slovak" is slightly changed. Now the |
590 |
rules for translating "q" and "Q" to "`" (backquote) are deleted, thus |
591 |
typing them inserts "q" and "Q" respectively. Rules for translating |
592 |
"=q", "+q", "=Q", and "+Q" to "`" are also deleted. Now, to input |
593 |
"`", you must type "=q". |
594 |
|
595 |
** If your terminal can't display characters from some of the ISO |
596 |
8859 character sets but can display Latin-1, you can display |
597 |
more-or-less mnemonic sequences of ASCII/Latin-1 characters instead of |
598 |
empty boxes (under a window system) or question marks (not under a |
599 |
window system). Customize the option `latin1-display' to turn this |
600 |
on. |
601 |
|
602 |
** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based |
603 |
on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill, |
604 |
defined in newcomment.el. You can choose different styles of region |
605 |
commenting with the variable `comment-style'. |
606 |
|
607 |
** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and |
608 |
`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail |
609 |
indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the |
610 |
indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive. |
611 |
|
612 |
** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines |
613 |
on the display using several methods |
614 |
|
615 |
- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be |
616 |
a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should |
617 |
be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames. |
618 |
|
619 |
- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is |
620 |
equivalent to specifying the frame parameter. |
621 |
|
622 |
- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line. |
623 |
|
624 |
- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is |
625 |
the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only. |
626 |
|
627 |
** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create |
628 |
an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The |
629 |
command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c, |
630 |
does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window. |
631 |
|
632 |
** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and |
633 |
`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups, |
634 |
typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory. |
635 |
|
636 |
** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1 |
637 |
characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities. |
638 |
|
639 |
** New X resources recognized |
640 |
|
641 |
*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies |
642 |
whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode |
643 |
is useful for debugging X problems. |
644 |
|
645 |
Example: |
646 |
|
647 |
emacs.synchronous: true |
648 |
|
649 |
*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the |
650 |
visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of |
651 |
the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class, |
652 |
and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid |
653 |
visual class names are |
654 |
|
655 |
TrueColor |
656 |
PseudoColor |
657 |
DirectColor |
658 |
StaticColor |
659 |
GrayScale |
660 |
StaticGray |
661 |
|
662 |
Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e. |
663 |
`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same |
664 |
meaning. |
665 |
|
666 |
The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes |
667 |
supported on your display, and which depths they have. If |
668 |
`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default |
669 |
visual. |
670 |
|
671 |
Example: |
672 |
|
673 |
emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8 |
674 |
|
675 |
*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap', |
676 |
specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the |
677 |
default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized |
678 |
resource values are `true' or `on'. |
679 |
|
680 |
Example: |
681 |
|
682 |
emacs.privateColormap: true |
683 |
|
684 |
** Faces and frame parameters. |
685 |
|
686 |
There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'. |
687 |
Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
688 |
`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face |
689 |
`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color' |
690 |
sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise |
691 |
for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame |
692 |
parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'. |
693 |
|
694 |
Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the |
695 |
`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters |
696 |
`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the |
697 |
`default' face and vice versa. |
698 |
|
699 |
** New face `menu'. |
700 |
|
701 |
The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus. |
702 |
|
703 |
** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction. |
704 |
|
705 |
The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for |
706 |
colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma |
707 |
correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies |
708 |
the screen gamma of a frame's display. |
709 |
|
710 |
PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result |
711 |
in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD |
712 |
color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2). |
713 |
|
714 |
The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class |
715 |
`ScreenGamma'. |
716 |
|
717 |
** Tabs and variable-width text. |
718 |
|
719 |
Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is |
720 |
defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is |
721 |
independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears. |
722 |
Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts. |
723 |
|
724 |
** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar |
725 |
|
726 |
*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin". |
727 |
|
728 |
emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5 |
729 |
|
730 |
The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the |
731 |
LessTif/Motif one. |
732 |
|
733 |
*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in |
734 |
LessTif and Motif. |
735 |
|
736 |
** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X. |
737 |
|
738 |
As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be |
739 |
drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set |
740 |
`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value. |
741 |
|
742 |
** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a |
743 |
bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi and Less). |
744 |
|
745 |
This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable |
746 |
`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this |
747 |
variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'. |
748 |
|
749 |
** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method. |
750 |
|
751 |
When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the |
752 |
value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggressively' is a |
753 |
number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
754 |
fraction of the window's height from the top of the window. |
755 |
|
756 |
When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the |
757 |
value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggressively' is a |
758 |
number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that |
759 |
fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window. |
760 |
|
761 |
** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either |
762 |
M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET. |
763 |
M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special |
764 |
buffers. |
765 |
|
766 |
** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history. |
767 |
|
768 |
** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows |
769 |
abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing |
770 |
`directory-abbrev-alist'. |
771 |
|
772 |
** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives |
773 |
the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be |
774 |
forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this |
775 |
value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system |
776 |
users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership, |
777 |
even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them. |
778 |
|
779 |
The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature. |
780 |
|
781 |
** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces, |
782 |
notably at the end of lines. |
783 |
|
784 |
All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted |
785 |
spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way. |
786 |
|
787 |
** The function `replace-rectangle' is an alias for `string-rectangle'. |
788 |
|
789 |
** The new command M-x string-insert-rectangle is like `string-rectangle', |
790 |
but inserts text instead of replacing it. |
791 |
|
792 |
** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like |
793 |
query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated |
794 |
after each match to get the replacement text. |
795 |
|
796 |
** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets |
797 |
you edit the replacement string. |
798 |
|
799 |
** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB' |
800 |
(if you load the library `mailabbrev'), lets you complete mail aliases |
801 |
in the text, analogous to lisp-complete-symbol. |
802 |
|
803 |
** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value. |
804 |
|
805 |
** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set |
806 |
to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it. |
807 |
|
808 |
** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains |
809 |
the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and |
810 |
MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus |
811 |
displayed by Emacs now have help strings. |
812 |
|
813 |
-- |
814 |
** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to |
815 |
read mail from the menu etc. |
816 |
|
817 |
** The environment variable `EMACSLOCKDIR' is no longer used on MS-Windows. |
818 |
This environment variable was used when creating lock files. Emacs on |
819 |
MS-Windows does not use this variable anymore. This change was made |
820 |
before Emacs 21.1, but wasn't documented until now. |
821 |
|
822 |
** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the |
823 |
MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
824 |
|
825 |
** The new command `msdos-set-mouse-buttons' forces the MS-DOS version |
826 |
of Emacs to behave as if the mouse had a specified number of buttons. |
827 |
This comes handy with mice that don't report their number of buttons |
828 |
correctly. One example is the wheeled mice, which report 3 buttons, |
829 |
but clicks on the middle button are not passed to the MS-DOS version |
830 |
of Emacs. |
831 |
|
832 |
** Customize changes |
833 |
|
834 |
*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the |
835 |
`State' menu to add comments, or give a prefix argument to |
836 |
M-x customize-set-variable or M-x customize-set-value. Note that |
837 |
customization comments will cause the customizations to fail in |
838 |
earlier versions of Emacs. |
839 |
|
840 |
*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill |
841 |
Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the |
842 |
default). |
843 |
|
844 |
*** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
845 |
does not allow you to save customizations in your `~/.emacs' init |
846 |
file. This is because saving customizations from such a session would |
847 |
wipe out all the other customizationss you might have on your init |
848 |
file. |
849 |
|
850 |
** If Emacs was invoked with the `-q' or `--no-init-file' options, it |
851 |
does not save disabled and enabled commands for future sessions, to |
852 |
avoid overwriting existing customizations of this kind that are |
853 |
already in your init file. |
854 |
|
855 |
** New features in evaluation commands |
856 |
|
857 |
*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp |
858 |
modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables |
859 |
print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the new |
860 |
customizable variables eval-expression-print-level, |
861 |
eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error. |
862 |
|
863 |
The default values for the first two of these variables are 12 and 4 |
864 |
respectively, which means that `eval-expression' now prints at most |
865 |
the first 12 members of a list and at most 4 nesting levels deep (if |
866 |
the list is longer or deeper than that, an ellipsis `...' is |
867 |
printed). |
868 |
|
869 |
<RET> or <mouse-2> on the printed text toggles between an abbreviated |
870 |
printed representation and an unabbreviated one. |
871 |
|
872 |
The default value of eval-expression-debug-on-error is t, so any error |
873 |
during evaluation produces a backtrace. |
874 |
|
875 |
*** The function `eval-defun' (C-M-x) now loads Edebug and instruments |
876 |
code when called with a prefix argument. |
877 |
|
878 |
** CC mode changes. |
879 |
|
880 |
Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with |
881 |
current user setups (although it's believed that these |
882 |
incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances). |
883 |
However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled |
884 |
back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward |
885 |
compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this |
886 |
release. |
887 |
|
888 |
*** The hardcoded switch to "java" style in Java mode is gone. |
889 |
CC Mode used to automatically set the style to "java" when Java mode |
890 |
is entered. This has now been removed since it caused too much |
891 |
confusion. |
892 |
|
893 |
However, to keep backward compatibility to a certain extent, the |
894 |
default value for c-default-style now specifies the "java" style for |
895 |
java-mode, but "gnu" for all other modes (as before). So you won't |
896 |
notice the change if you haven't touched that variable. |
897 |
|
898 |
*** New cleanups, space-before-funcall and compact-empty-funcall. |
899 |
Two new cleanups have been added to c-cleanup-list: |
900 |
|
901 |
space-before-funcall causes a space to be inserted before the opening |
902 |
parenthesis of a function call, which gives the style "foo (bar)". |
903 |
|
904 |
compact-empty-funcall causes any space before a function call opening |
905 |
parenthesis to be removed if there are no arguments to the function. |
906 |
It's typically useful together with space-before-funcall to get the |
907 |
style "foo (bar)" and "foo()". |
908 |
|
909 |
*** Some keywords now automatically trigger reindentation. |
910 |
Keywords like "else", "while", "catch" and "finally" have been made |
911 |
"electric" to make them reindent automatically when they continue an |
912 |
earlier statement. An example: |
913 |
|
914 |
for (i = 0; i < 17; i++) |
915 |
if (a[i]) |
916 |
res += a[i]->offset; |
917 |
else |
918 |
|
919 |
Here, the "else" should be indented like the preceding "if", since it |
920 |
continues that statement. CC Mode will automatically reindent it after |
921 |
the "else" has been typed in full, since it's not until then it's |
922 |
possible to decide whether it's a new statement or a continuation of |
923 |
the preceding "if". |
924 |
|
925 |
CC Mode uses Abbrev mode to achieve this, which is therefore turned on |
926 |
by default. |
927 |
|
928 |
*** M-a and M-e now moves by sentence in multiline strings. |
929 |
Previously these two keys only moved by sentence in comments, which |
930 |
meant that sentence movement didn't work in strings containing |
931 |
documentation or other natural language text. |
932 |
|
933 |
The reason it's only activated in multiline strings (i.e. strings that |
934 |
contain a newline, even when escaped by a '\') is to avoid stopping in |
935 |
the short strings that often reside inside statements. Multiline |
936 |
strings almost always contain text in a natural language, as opposed |
937 |
to other strings that typically contain format specifications, |
938 |
commands, etc. Also, it's not that bothersome that M-a and M-e misses |
939 |
sentences in single line strings, since they're short anyway. |
940 |
|
941 |
*** Support for autodoc comments in Pike mode. |
942 |
Autodoc comments for Pike are used to extract documentation from the |
943 |
source, like Javadoc in Java. Pike mode now recognize this markup in |
944 |
comment prefixes and paragraph starts. |
945 |
|
946 |
*** The comment prefix regexps on c-comment-prefix may be mode specific. |
947 |
When c-comment-prefix is an association list, it specifies the comment |
948 |
line prefix on a per-mode basis, like c-default-style does. This |
949 |
change came about to support the special autodoc comment prefix in |
950 |
Pike mode only. |
951 |
|
952 |
*** Better handling of syntactic errors. |
953 |
The recovery after unbalanced parens earlier in the buffer has been |
954 |
improved; CC Mode now reports them by dinging and giving a message |
955 |
stating the offending line, but still recovers and indent the |
956 |
following lines in a sane way (most of the time). An "else" with no |
957 |
matching "if" is handled similarly. If an error is discovered while |
958 |
indenting a region, the whole region is still indented and the error |
959 |
is reported afterwards. |
960 |
|
961 |
*** Lineup functions may now return absolute columns. |
962 |
A lineup function can give an absolute column to indent the line to by |
963 |
returning a vector with the desired column as the first element. |
964 |
|
965 |
*** More robust and warning-free byte compilation. |
966 |
Although this is strictly not a user visible change (well, depending |
967 |
on the view of a user), it's still worth mentioning that CC Mode now |
968 |
can be compiled in the standard ways without causing trouble. Some |
969 |
code have also been moved between the subpackages to enhance the |
970 |
modularity somewhat. Thanks to Martin Buchholz for doing the |
971 |
groundwork. |
972 |
|
973 |
*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t. |
974 |
This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior |
975 |
of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for |
976 |
non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might |
977 |
want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't |
978 |
have to bother. |
979 |
|
980 |
Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing |
981 |
situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally |
982 |
and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session. |
983 |
If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of |
984 |
the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java" |
985 |
by default) to override the global settings made by the user. |
986 |
|
987 |
*** New initialization procedure for the style system. |
988 |
When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the |
989 |
variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now |
990 |
take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This |
991 |
is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific |
992 |
settings would override the global settings. This change makes it |
993 |
possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with |
994 |
Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file. |
995 |
|
996 |
By default, the global value of every style variable is the new |
997 |
special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from |
998 |
the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting |
999 |
of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described |
1000 |
above. |
1001 |
|
1002 |
Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only* |
1003 |
when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode |
1004 |
function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a |
1005 |
call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style --- |
1006 |
then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style |
1007 |
values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values |
1008 |
only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the |
1009 |
function documentation for more info. |
1010 |
|
1011 |
The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users, |
1012 |
especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or |
1013 |
with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is |
1014 |
intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well, |
1015 |
such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system |
1016 |
is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current |
1017 |
configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and |
1018 |
global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set. |
1019 |
|
1020 |
(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.) |
1021 |
|
1022 |
**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable. |
1023 |
This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior. |
1024 |
|
1025 |
This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style |
1026 |
variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be |
1027 |
completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when |
1028 |
the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the |
1029 |
empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the |
1030 |
style system. |
1031 |
|
1032 |
**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior. |
1033 |
In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set |
1034 |
c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back |
1035 |
as far as possible. |
1036 |
|
1037 |
*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling. |
1038 |
CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the |
1039 |
surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new |
1040 |
chapter about this in the manual. |
1041 |
|
1042 |
**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations. |
1043 |
The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly |
1044 |
recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's |
1045 |
primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and |
1046 |
adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses. |
1047 |
|
1048 |
**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix. |
1049 |
This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable |
1050 |
c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings. |
1051 |
|
1052 |
**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode. |
1053 |
This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments. |
1054 |
|
1055 |
It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC |
1056 |
Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/). |
1057 |
A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use |
1058 |
inside CC Mode. |
1059 |
|
1060 |
Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that |
1061 |
causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match |
1062 |
the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is |
1063 |
available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/ |
1064 |
cc-mode/). |
1065 |
|
1066 |
**** The variables `c-hanging-comment-starter-p' and |
1067 |
`c-hanging-comment-ender-p', which controlled how comment starters and |
1068 |
enders were filled, are not used anymore. The new version of the |
1069 |
function `c-fill-paragraph' keeps the comment starters and enders as |
1070 |
they were before the filling. |
1071 |
|
1072 |
**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling. |
1073 |
The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in |
1074 |
specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string |
1075 |
literals. |
1076 |
|
1077 |
**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break. |
1078 |
It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line |
1079 |
prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If |
1080 |
you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to |
1081 |
this function. |
1082 |
|
1083 |
*** Fixes to IDL mode. |
1084 |
It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant |
1085 |
to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a |
1086 |
struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword. |
1087 |
Thanks to Eric Eide. |
1088 |
|
1089 |
*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style. |
1090 |
It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when |
1091 |
opening braces hangs and when they don't. |
1092 |
|
1093 |
**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block. |
1094 |
|
1095 |
*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block. |
1096 |
See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a |
1097 |
better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates, |
1098 |
and is used by default to line up continued template arguments. |
1099 |
|
1100 |
*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the |
1101 |
previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in |
1102 |
the column specified by comment-column. |
1103 |
|
1104 |
*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments. |
1105 |
In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation |
1106 |
is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line |
1107 |
prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that |
1108 |
contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally |
1109 |
don't want CC Mode to change the indentation. |
1110 |
|
1111 |
*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start |
1112 |
instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup |
1113 |
arguments. |
1114 |
|
1115 |
*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings. |
1116 |
|
1117 |
*** More preprocessor directive movement functions. |
1118 |
c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional. |
1119 |
c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are |
1120 |
variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don |
1121 |
Provan). |
1122 |
|
1123 |
*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations. |
1124 |
|
1125 |
** Dired changes |
1126 |
|
1127 |
*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete |
1128 |
command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default |
1129 |
is, delete only empty directories. |
1130 |
|
1131 |
*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy |
1132 |
command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not |
1133 |
copy directories recursively. |
1134 |
|
1135 |
*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?' |
1136 |
in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with |
1137 |
the difference that the command will be run on each file individually. |
1138 |
|
1139 |
*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a') |
1140 |
replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or |
1141 |
directory. |
1142 |
|
1143 |
*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `y') shows |
1144 |
a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on. |
1145 |
This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so |
1146 |
will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as |
1147 |
accurate or inaccurate as it is. |
1148 |
|
1149 |
*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R' |
1150 |
from ls switches. |
1151 |
|
1152 |
*** Dired commands that prompt for a destination file now allow the use |
1153 |
of the `M-n' command in the minibuffer to insert the source filename, |
1154 |
which the user can then edit. This only works if there is a single |
1155 |
source file, not when operating on multiple marked files. |
1156 |
|
1157 |
** Gnus changes. |
1158 |
|
1159 |
The Gnus NEWS entries are short, but they reflect sweeping changes in |
1160 |
four areas: Article display treatment, MIME treatment, |
1161 |
internationalization and mail-fetching. |
1162 |
|
1163 |
*** The mail-fetching functions have changed. See the manual for the |
1164 |
many details. In particular, all procmail fetching variables are gone. |
1165 |
|
1166 |
If you used procmail like in |
1167 |
|
1168 |
(setq nnmail-use-procmail t) |
1169 |
(setq nnmail-spool-file 'procmail) |
1170 |
(setq nnmail-procmail-directory "~/mail/incoming/") |
1171 |
(setq nnmail-procmail-suffix "\\.in") |
1172 |
|
1173 |
this now has changed to |
1174 |
|
1175 |
(setq mail-sources |
1176 |
'((directory :path "~/mail/incoming/" |
1177 |
:suffix ".in"))) |
1178 |
|
1179 |
More information is available in the info doc at Select Methods -> |
1180 |
Getting Mail -> Mail Sources |
1181 |
|
1182 |
*** Gnus is now a MIME-capable reader. This affects many parts of |
1183 |
Gnus, and adds a slew of new commands. See the manual for details. |
1184 |
Separate MIME packages like RMIME, mime-compose etc., will probably no |
1185 |
longer work; remove them and use the native facilities. |
1186 |
|
1187 |
The FLIM/SEMI package still works with Emacs 21, but if you want to |
1188 |
use the native facilities, you must remove any mailcap.el[c] that was |
1189 |
installed by FLIM/SEMI version 1.13 or earlier. |
1190 |
|
1191 |
*** Gnus has also been multilingualized. This also affects too many |
1192 |
parts of Gnus to summarize here, and adds many new variables. There |
1193 |
are built-in facilities equivalent to those of gnus-mule.el, which is |
1194 |
now just a compatibility layer. |
1195 |
|
1196 |
*** gnus-mule.el is now just a compatibility layer over the built-in |
1197 |
Gnus facilities. |
1198 |
|
1199 |
*** gnus-auto-select-first can now be a function to be |
1200 |
called to position point. |
1201 |
|
1202 |
*** The user can now decide which extra headers should be included in |
1203 |
summary buffers and NOV files. |
1204 |
|
1205 |
*** `gnus-article-display-hook' has been removed. Instead, a number |
1206 |
of variables starting with `gnus-treat-' have been added. |
1207 |
|
1208 |
*** The Gnus posting styles have been redone again and now work in a |
1209 |
subtly different manner. |
1210 |
|
1211 |
*** New web-based backends have been added: nnslashdot, nnwarchive |
1212 |
and nnultimate. nnweb has been revamped, again, to keep up with |
1213 |
ever-changing layouts. |
1214 |
|
1215 |
*** Gnus can now read IMAP mail via nnimap. |
1216 |
|
1217 |
*** There is image support of various kinds and some sound support. |
1218 |
|
1219 |
** Changes in Texinfo mode. |
1220 |
|
1221 |
*** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo |
1222 |
macros |
1223 |
|
1224 |
Key binding Macro |
1225 |
------------------------- |
1226 |
C-c C-c C-s @strong |
1227 |
C-c C-c C-e @emph |
1228 |
C-c C-c u @uref |
1229 |
C-c C-c q @quotation |
1230 |
C-c C-c m @email |
1231 |
C-c C-o @<block> ... @end <block> |
1232 |
M-RET @item |
1233 |
|
1234 |
*** The " key now inserts either " or `` or '' depending on context. |
1235 |
|
1236 |
** Changes in Outline mode. |
1237 |
|
1238 |
There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command |
1239 |
`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to |
1240 |
the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents. |
1241 |
|
1242 |
** Changes to Emacs Server |
1243 |
|
1244 |
*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do |
1245 |
with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers |
1246 |
are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with |
1247 |
Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which |
1248 |
buffers to kill, as before. |
1249 |
|
1250 |
Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client, |
1251 |
i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in |
1252 |
this way. |
1253 |
|
1254 |
** Both emacsclient and Emacs itself now accept command line options |
1255 |
of the form +LINE:COLUMN in addition to +LINE. |
1256 |
|
1257 |
** Changes to Show Paren mode. |
1258 |
|
1259 |
*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property. |
1260 |
The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to |
1261 |
use. Default is 1000. |
1262 |
|
1263 |
** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren |
1264 |
groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes). |
1265 |
|
1266 |
** Changes to hideshow.el |
1267 |
|
1268 |
*** Generalized block selection and traversal |
1269 |
|
1270 |
A block is now recognized by its start and end regexps (both strings), |
1271 |
and an integer specifying which sub-expression in the start regexp |
1272 |
serves as the place where a `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. |
1273 |
See the documentation of variable `hs-special-modes-alist'. |
1274 |
|
1275 |
*** During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, |
1276 |
hidden blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' can |
1277 |
be used in the mode line format to show the line at the beginning of |
1278 |
the open block. |
1279 |
|
1280 |
*** User option `hs-hide-all-non-comment-function' specifies a |
1281 |
function to be called at each top-level block beginning, instead of |
1282 |
the normal block-hiding function. |
1283 |
|
1284 |
*** The command `hs-show-region' has been removed. |
1285 |
|
1286 |
*** The key bindings have changed to fit the Emacs conventions, |
1287 |
roughly imitating those of Outline minor mode. Notably, the prefix |
1288 |
for all bindings is now `C-c @'. For details, see the documentation |
1289 |
for `hs-minor-mode'. |
1290 |
|
1291 |
*** The variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' has been removed, and |
1292 |
hideshow.el now always behaves as if this variable were set to t. |
1293 |
|
1294 |
** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions |
1295 |
|
1296 |
*** If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes |
1297 |
an entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making |
1298 |
log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions. |
1299 |
|
1300 |
**** New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the |
1301 |
current buffer. |
1302 |
|
1303 |
*** New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries |
1304 |
in a log file. |
1305 |
|
1306 |
*** Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log |
1307 |
entries if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil. |
1308 |
Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's |
1309 |
version number is performed based on regular expressions from |
1310 |
`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be customized. |
1311 |
Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file. |
1312 |
|
1313 |
*** Change Log mode now defines its own faces for font-lock highlighting. |
1314 |
|
1315 |
** Changes to cmuscheme |
1316 |
|
1317 |
*** The user-option `scheme-program-name' has been renamed |
1318 |
`cmuscheme-program-name' due to conflicts with xscheme.el. |
1319 |
|
1320 |
** Changes in Font Lock |
1321 |
|
1322 |
*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove |
1323 |
font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major mode. |
1324 |
|
1325 |
*** Multi-line patterns are now supported. Modes using this, should |
1326 |
set font-lock-multiline to t in their font-lock-defaults. |
1327 |
|
1328 |
*** `font-lock-syntactic-face-function' allows major-modes to choose |
1329 |
the face used for each string/comment. |
1330 |
|
1331 |
*** A new standard face `font-lock-doc-face'. |
1332 |
Meant for Lisp docstrings, Javadoc comments and other "documentation in code". |
1333 |
|
1334 |
** Changes to Shell mode |
1335 |
|
1336 |
*** The `shell' command now accepts an optional argument to specify the buffer |
1337 |
to use, which defaults to "*shell*". When used interactively, a |
1338 |
non-default buffer may be specified by giving the `shell' command a |
1339 |
prefix argument (causing it to prompt for the buffer name). |
1340 |
|
1341 |
** Comint (subshell) changes |
1342 |
|
1343 |
These changes generally affect all modes derived from comint mode, which |
1344 |
include shell-mode, gdb-mode, scheme-interaction-mode, etc. |
1345 |
|
1346 |
*** Comint now by default interprets some carriage-control characters. |
1347 |
Comint now removes CRs from CR LF sequences, and treats single CRs and |
1348 |
BSs in the output in a way similar to a terminal (by deleting to the |
1349 |
beginning of the line, or deleting the previous character, |
1350 |
respectively). This is achieved by adding `comint-carriage-motion' to |
1351 |
the `comint-output-filter-functions' hook by default. |
1352 |
|
1353 |
*** By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' |
1354 |
to distinguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which |
1355 |
parts of the text were output by the process, and which entered by the |
1356 |
user, and attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use |
1357 |
this information. Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, |
1358 |
respect field boundaries in a fairly natural manner. To disable this |
1359 |
feature, and use the old behavior, customize the user option |
1360 |
`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields'. |
1361 |
|
1362 |
*** Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes |
1363 |
and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers. |
1364 |
|
1365 |
*** The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and |
1366 |
buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current |
1367 |
buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer. |
1368 |
|
1369 |
The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like |
1370 |
M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of |
1371 |
the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer. |
1372 |
|
1373 |
*** Packages based on comint now highlight user input and program prompts, |
1374 |
and support choosing previous input with mouse-2. To control these features, |
1375 |
see the user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'. |
1376 |
|
1377 |
*** The new command `comint-write-output' (usually bound to `C-c C-s') |
1378 |
saves the output from the most recent command to a file. With a prefix |
1379 |
argument, it appends to the file. |
1380 |
|
1381 |
*** The command `comint-kill-output' has been renamed `comint-delete-output' |
1382 |
(usually bound to `C-c C-o'); the old name is aliased to it for |
1383 |
compatibility. |
1384 |
|
1385 |
*** The new function `comint-add-to-input-history' adds commands to the input |
1386 |
ring (history). |
1387 |
|
1388 |
*** The new variable `comint-input-history-ignore' is a regexp for |
1389 |
identifying history lines that should be ignored, like tcsh time-stamp |
1390 |
strings, starting with a `#'. The default value of this variable is "^#". |
1391 |
|
1392 |
** Changes to Rmail mode |
1393 |
|
1394 |
*** The new user-option rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be |
1395 |
set to fine tune the identification of the correspondent when |
1396 |
receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the |
1397 |
recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default, |
1398 |
`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself |
1399 |
as correspondent. |
1400 |
|
1401 |
Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect |
1402 |
mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a |
1403 |
regexp matching your mail addresses. |
1404 |
|
1405 |
*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how |
1406 |
to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an |
1407 |
Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation |
1408 |
with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask |
1409 |
for confirmation with yes-or-no-p. |
1410 |
|
1411 |
*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg, |
1412 |
like `j'. |
1413 |
|
1414 |
*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that |
1415 |
specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a |
1416 |
digest message. |
1417 |
|
1418 |
*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies |
1419 |
in which folder to put messages automatically. |
1420 |
|
1421 |
*** The new function `rmail-redecode-body' allows to fix a message |
1422 |
with non-ASCII characters if Emacs happens to decode it incorrectly |
1423 |
due to missing or malformed "charset=" header. |
1424 |
|
1425 |
** The new user-option `mail-envelope-from' can be used to specify |
1426 |
an envelope-from address different from user-mail-address. |
1427 |
|
1428 |
** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to |
1429 |
use the -f option when sending mail. |
1430 |
|
1431 |
** The Rmail command `o' (`rmail-output-to-rmail-file') now writes the |
1432 |
current message in the internal `emacs-mule' encoding, rather than in |
1433 |
the encoding taken from the variable `buffer-file-coding-system'. |
1434 |
This allows to save messages whose characters cannot be safely encoded |
1435 |
by the buffer's coding system, and makes sure the message will be |
1436 |
displayed correctly when you later visit the target Rmail file. |
1437 |
|
1438 |
If you want your Rmail files be encoded in a specific coding system |
1439 |
other than `emacs-mule', you can customize the variable |
1440 |
`rmail-file-coding-system' to set its value to that coding system. |
1441 |
|
1442 |
** Changes to TeX mode |
1443 |
|
1444 |
*** The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to |
1445 |
`latex-mode'. |
1446 |
|
1447 |
*** latex-mode now has a simple indentation algorithm. |
1448 |
|
1449 |
*** M-f and M-p jump around \begin...\end pairs. |
1450 |
|
1451 |
*** Added support for outline-minor-mode. |
1452 |
|
1453 |
** Changes to RefTeX mode |
1454 |
|
1455 |
*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be |
1456 |
created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys. |
1457 |
Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default |
1458 |
macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically |
1459 |
sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries |
1460 |
can be edited from that buffer. |
1461 |
|
1462 |
*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several |
1463 |
items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or |
1464 |
`A' to use all marked entries). |
1465 |
|
1466 |
*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce |
1467 |
memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used. |
1468 |
|
1469 |
*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &' |
1470 |
in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order |
1471 |
to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has |
1472 |
been cited. |
1473 |
|
1474 |
** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings. |
1475 |
The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading |
1476 |
semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `(' |
1477 |
in column 1 are always made leaves. |
1478 |
|
1479 |
** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks) |
1480 |
has the following new features: |
1481 |
|
1482 |
*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern |
1483 |
may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like |
1484 |
to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable |
1485 |
time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns. |
1486 |
|
1487 |
*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This |
1488 |
feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source |
1489 |
file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the |
1490 |
compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching |
1491 |
pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it |
1492 |
defaults to 1. |
1493 |
|
1494 |
** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in |
1495 |
file names. |
1496 |
|
1497 |
** Ispell changes |
1498 |
|
1499 |
*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if |
1500 |
transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it |
1501 |
spell-checks the current buffer. |
1502 |
|
1503 |
*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been |
1504 |
added. |
1505 |
|
1506 |
*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling |
1507 |
correction is made and re-checked. |
1508 |
|
1509 |
*** An Italian, Portuguese, and Slovak dictionary definition has been added. |
1510 |
|
1511 |
*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some |
1512 |
cases. |
1513 |
|
1514 |
*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict |
1515 |
on syntax errors. |
1516 |
|
1517 |
*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the |
1518 |
end of the buffer. |
1519 |
|
1520 |
*** Spell checking now works in the MS-DOS version of Emacs. |
1521 |
|
1522 |
** Makefile mode changes |
1523 |
|
1524 |
*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'. |
1525 |
|
1526 |
*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when |
1527 |
Fontlock mode is active. |
1528 |
|
1529 |
** Isearch changes |
1530 |
|
1531 |
*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history, |
1532 |
so that searches can be resumed. |
1533 |
|
1534 |
*** In Isearch mode, C-M-s and C-M-r are now bound like C-s and C-r, |
1535 |
respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys |
1536 |
that started the search. |
1537 |
|
1538 |
*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current |
1539 |
selection into the search string rather than giving an error. |
1540 |
|
1541 |
*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search. |
1542 |
|
1543 |
Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable |
1544 |
`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current |
1545 |
search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as |
1546 |
before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are |
1547 |
highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to |
1548 |
`secondary-selection'. |
1549 |
|
1550 |
The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor |
1551 |
will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search. |
1552 |
Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion |
1553 |
using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its |
1554 |
usual snappy response. |
1555 |
|
1556 |
If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for |
1557 |
matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is |
1558 |
set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x |
1559 |
isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'. |
1560 |
|
1561 |
** VC Changes |
1562 |
|
1563 |
VC has been overhauled internally. It is now modular, making it |
1564 |
easier to plug-in arbitrary version control backends. (See Lisp |
1565 |
Changes for details on the new structure.) As a result, the mechanism |
1566 |
to enable and disable support for particular version systems has |
1567 |
changed: everything is now controlled by the new variable |
1568 |
`vc-handled-backends'. Its value is a list of symbols that identify |
1569 |
version systems; the default is '(RCS CVS SCCS). When finding a file, |
1570 |
each of the backends in that list is tried in order to see whether the |
1571 |
file is registered in that backend. |
1572 |
|
1573 |
When registering a new file, VC first tries each of the listed |
1574 |
backends to see if any of them considers itself "responsible" for the |
1575 |
directory of the file (e.g. because a corresponding subdirectory for |
1576 |
master files exists). If none of the backends is responsible, then |
1577 |
the first backend in the list that could register the file is chosen. |
1578 |
As a consequence, the variable `vc-default-back-end' is now obsolete. |
1579 |
|
1580 |
The old variable `vc-master-templates' is also obsolete, although VC |
1581 |
still supports it for backward compatibility. To define templates for |
1582 |
RCS or SCCS, you should rather use the new variables |
1583 |
vc-{rcs,sccs}-master-templates. (There is no such feature under CVS |
1584 |
where it doesn't make sense.) |
1585 |
|
1586 |
The variables `vc-ignore-vc-files' and `vc-handle-cvs' are also |
1587 |
obsolete now, you must set `vc-handled-backends' to nil or exclude |
1588 |
`CVS' from the list, respectively, to achieve their effect now. |
1589 |
|
1590 |
*** General Changes |
1591 |
|
1592 |
The variable `vc-checkout-carefully' is obsolete: the corresponding |
1593 |
checks are always done now. |
1594 |
|
1595 |
VC Dired buffers are now kept up-to-date during all version control |
1596 |
operations. |
1597 |
|
1598 |
`vc-diff' output is now displayed in `diff-mode'. |
1599 |
`vc-print-log' uses `log-view-mode'. |
1600 |
`vc-log-mode' (used for *VC-Log*) has been replaced by `log-edit-mode'. |
1601 |
|
1602 |
The command C-x v m (vc-merge) now accepts an empty argument as the |
1603 |
first revision number. This means that any recent changes on the |
1604 |
current branch should be picked up from the repository and merged into |
1605 |
the working file (``merge news''). |
1606 |
|
1607 |
The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
1608 |
(vc-retrieve-snapshot) now ask for a directory name from which to work |
1609 |
downwards. |
1610 |
|
1611 |
*** Multiple Backends |
1612 |
|
1613 |
VC now lets you register files in more than one backend. This is |
1614 |
useful, for example, if you are working with a slow remote CVS |
1615 |
repository. You can then use RCS for local editing, and occasionally |
1616 |
commit your changes back to CVS, or pick up changes from CVS into your |
1617 |
local RCS archives. |
1618 |
|
1619 |
To make this work, the ``more local'' backend (RCS in our example) |
1620 |
should come first in `vc-handled-backends', and the ``more remote'' |
1621 |
backend (CVS) should come later. (The default value of |
1622 |
`vc-handled-backends' already has it that way.) |
1623 |
|
1624 |
You can then commit changes to another backend (say, RCS), by typing |
1625 |
C-u C-x v v RCS RET (i.e. vc-next-action now accepts a backend name as |
1626 |
a revision number). VC registers the file in the more local backend |
1627 |
if that hasn't already happened, and commits to a branch based on the |
1628 |
current revision number from the more remote backend. |
1629 |
|
1630 |
If a file is registered in multiple backends, you can switch to |
1631 |
another one using C-x v b (vc-switch-backend). This does not change |
1632 |
any files, it only changes VC's perspective on the file. Use this to |
1633 |
pick up changes from CVS while working under RCS locally. |
1634 |
|
1635 |
After you are done with your local RCS editing, you can commit your |
1636 |
changes back to CVS using C-u C-x v v CVS RET. In this case, the |
1637 |
local RCS archive is removed after the commit, and the log entry |
1638 |
buffer is initialized to contain the entire RCS change log of the file. |
1639 |
|
1640 |
*** Changes for CVS |
1641 |
|
1642 |
There is a new user option, `vc-cvs-stay-local'. If it is `t' (the |
1643 |
default), then VC avoids network queries for files registered in |
1644 |
remote repositories. The state of such files is then only determined |
1645 |
by heuristics and past information. `vc-cvs-stay-local' can also be a |
1646 |
regexp to match against repository hostnames; only files from hosts |
1647 |
that match it are treated locally. If the variable is nil, then VC |
1648 |
queries the repository just as often as it does for local files. |
1649 |
|
1650 |
If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, then VC also makes local backups of |
1651 |
repository versions. This means that ordinary diffs (C-x v =) and |
1652 |
revert operations (C-x v u) can be done completely locally, without |
1653 |
any repository interactions at all. The name of a local version |
1654 |
backup of FILE is FILE.~REV.~, where REV is the repository version |
1655 |
number. This format is similar to that used by C-x v ~ |
1656 |
(vc-version-other-window), except for the trailing dot. As a matter |
1657 |
of fact, the two features can each use the files created by the other, |
1658 |
the only difference being that files with a trailing `.' are deleted |
1659 |
automatically after commit. (This feature doesn't work on MS-DOS, |
1660 |
since DOS disallows more than a single dot in the trunk of a file |
1661 |
name.) |
1662 |
|
1663 |
If `vc-cvs-stay-local' is on, and there have been changes in the |
1664 |
repository, VC notifies you about it when you actually try to commit. |
1665 |
If you want to check for updates from the repository without trying to |
1666 |
commit, you can either use C-x v m RET to perform an update on the |
1667 |
current file, or you can use C-x v r RET to get an update for an |
1668 |
entire directory tree. |
1669 |
|
1670 |
The new user option `vc-cvs-use-edit' indicates whether VC should call |
1671 |
"cvs edit" to make files writeable; it defaults to `t'. (This option |
1672 |
is only meaningful if the CVSREAD variable is set, or if files are |
1673 |
"watched" by other developers.) |
1674 |
|
1675 |
The commands C-x v s (vc-create-snapshot) and C-x v r |
1676 |
(vc-retrieve-snapshot) are now also implemented for CVS. If you give |
1677 |
an empty snapshot name to the latter, that performs a `cvs update', |
1678 |
starting at the given directory. |
1679 |
|
1680 |
*** Lisp Changes in VC |
1681 |
|
1682 |
VC has been restructured internally to make it modular. You can now |
1683 |
add support for arbitrary version control backends by writing a |
1684 |
library that provides a certain set of backend-specific functions, and |
1685 |
then telling VC to use that library. For example, to add support for |
1686 |
a version system named SYS, you write a library named vc-sys.el, which |
1687 |
provides a number of functions vc-sys-... (see commentary at the top |
1688 |
of vc.el for a detailed list of them). To make VC use that library, |
1689 |
you need to put it somewhere into Emacs' load path and add the symbol |
1690 |
`SYS' to the list `vc-handled-backends'. |
1691 |
|
1692 |
** The customizable EDT emulation package now supports the EDT |
1693 |
SUBS command and EDT scroll margins. It also works with more |
1694 |
terminal/keyboard configurations and it now works under XEmacs. |
1695 |
See etc/edt-user.doc for more information. |
1696 |
|
1697 |
** New modes and packages |
1698 |
|
1699 |
*** The new global minor mode `minibuffer-electric-default-mode' |
1700 |
automatically hides the `(default ...)' part of minibuffer prompts when |
1701 |
the default is not applicable. |
1702 |
|
1703 |
*** Artist is an Emacs lisp package that allows you to draw lines, |
1704 |
rectangles and ellipses by using your mouse and/or keyboard. The |
1705 |
shapes are made up with the ascii characters |, -, / and \. |
1706 |
|
1707 |
Features are: |
1708 |
|
1709 |
- Intersecting: When a `|' intersects with a `-', a `+' is |
1710 |
drawn, like this: | \ / |
1711 |
--+-- X |
1712 |
| / \ |
1713 |
|
1714 |
- Rubber-banding: When drawing lines you can interactively see the |
1715 |
result while holding the mouse button down and moving the mouse. If |
1716 |
your machine is not fast enough (a 386 is a bit too slow, but a |
1717 |
pentium is well enough), you can turn this feature off. You will |
1718 |
then see 1's and 2's which mark the 1st and 2nd endpoint of the line |
1719 |
you are drawing. |
1720 |
|
1721 |
- Arrows: After having drawn a (straight) line or a (straight) |
1722 |
poly-line, you can set arrows on the line-ends by typing < or >. |
1723 |
|
1724 |
- Flood-filling: You can fill any area with a certain character by |
1725 |
flood-filling. |
1726 |
|
1727 |
- Cut copy and paste: You can cut, copy and paste rectangular |
1728 |
regions. Artist also interfaces with the rect package (this can be |
1729 |
turned off if it causes you any trouble) so anything you cut in |
1730 |
artist can be yanked with C-x r y and vice versa. |
1731 |
|
1732 |
- Drawing with keys: Everything you can do with the mouse, you can |
1733 |
also do without the mouse. |
1734 |
|
1735 |
- Aspect-ratio: You can set the variable artist-aspect-ratio to |
1736 |
reflect the height-width ratio for the font you are using. Squares |
1737 |
and circles are then drawn square/round. Note, that once your |
1738 |
ascii-file is shown with font with a different height-width ratio, |
1739 |
the squares won't be square and the circles won't be round. |
1740 |
|
1741 |
- Drawing operations: The following drawing operations are implemented: |
1742 |
|
1743 |
lines straight-lines |
1744 |
rectangles squares |
1745 |
poly-lines straight poly-lines |
1746 |
ellipses circles |
1747 |
text (see-thru) text (overwrite) |
1748 |
spray-can setting size for spraying |
1749 |
vaporize line vaporize lines |
1750 |
erase characters erase rectangles |
1751 |
|
1752 |
Straight lines are lines that go horizontally, vertically or |
1753 |
diagonally. Plain lines go in any direction. The operations in |
1754 |
the right column are accessed by holding down the shift key while |
1755 |
drawing. |
1756 |
|
1757 |
It is possible to vaporize (erase) entire lines and connected lines |
1758 |
(rectangles for example) as long as the lines being vaporized are |
1759 |
straight and connected at their endpoints. Vaporizing is inspired |
1760 |
by the drawrect package by Jari Aalto <jari.aalto@poboxes.com>. |
1761 |
|
1762 |
- Picture mode compatibility: Artist is picture mode compatible (this |
1763 |
can be turned off). |
1764 |
|
1765 |
*** The new package Eshell is an operating system command shell |
1766 |
implemented entirely in Emacs Lisp. Use `M-x eshell' to invoke it. |
1767 |
It functions similarly to bash and zsh, and allows running of Lisp |
1768 |
functions and external commands using the same syntax. It supports |
1769 |
history lists, aliases, extended globbing, smart scrolling, etc. It |
1770 |
will work on any platform Emacs has been ported to. And since most of |
1771 |
the basic commands -- ls, rm, mv, cp, ln, du, cat, etc. -- have been |
1772 |
rewritten in Lisp, it offers an operating-system independent shell, |
1773 |
all within the scope of your Emacs process. |
1774 |
|
1775 |
*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time |
1776 |
intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the |
1777 |
typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working |
1778 |
on certain projects. |
1779 |
|
1780 |
*** The new package hi-lock.el provides commands to highlight matches |
1781 |
of interactively entered regexps. For example, |
1782 |
|
1783 |
M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET |
1784 |
|
1785 |
will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background |
1786 |
face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are |
1787 |
typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting. |
1788 |
Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of |
1789 |
appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the |
1790 |
current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the |
1791 |
corresponding file is read. There are commands to highlight matches |
1792 |
to phrases and to highlight entire lines containing a match. |
1793 |
|
1794 |
*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when |
1795 |
Emacs is idle. |
1796 |
|
1797 |
*** The new package tildify.el allows to add hard spaces or other text |
1798 |
fragments in accordance with the current major mode. |
1799 |
|
1800 |
*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML |
1801 |
parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however. |
1802 |
|
1803 |
*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el |
1804 |
package which allows different styles of comment-region and should |
1805 |
be more robust while offering the same functionality. |
1806 |
`comment-region' now doesn't always comment a-line-at-a-time, but only |
1807 |
comments the region, breaking the line at point if necessary. |
1808 |
|
1809 |
*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags |
1810 |
facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a |
1811 |
separate Texinfo file. |
1812 |
|
1813 |
*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or |
1814 |
by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument) |
1815 |
provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with |
1816 |
`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to |
1817 |
enter check-in log messages. |
1818 |
|
1819 |
*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages |
1820 |
without invoking external programs. |
1821 |
|
1822 |
The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp |
1823 |
and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike |
1824 |
`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it |
1825 |
is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and |
1826 |
Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available. |
1827 |
|
1828 |
The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man |
1829 |
page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does. |
1830 |
|
1831 |
*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for |
1832 |
authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback. |
1833 |
|
1834 |
The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for |
1835 |
the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in |
1836 |
the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing. |
1837 |
Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so |
1838 |
even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a |
1839 |
single step. |
1840 |
|
1841 |
On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like |
1842 |
matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will |
1843 |
probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp |
1844 |
contains such to get feedback about their respective limits. |
1845 |
|
1846 |
*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes |
1847 |
unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without |
1848 |
actually modifying content of a buffer. |
1849 |
|
1850 |
*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in |
1851 |
PostScript. |
1852 |
|
1853 |
Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc. |
1854 |
|
1855 |
The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements: |
1856 |
|
1857 |
; comment (until end of line) |
1858 |
A non-terminal |
1859 |
"C" terminal |
1860 |
?C? special |
1861 |
$A default non-terminal |
1862 |
$"C" default terminal |
1863 |
$?C? default special |
1864 |
A = B. production (A is the header and B the body) |
1865 |
C D sequence (C occurs before D) |
1866 |
C | D alternative (C or D occurs) |
1867 |
A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal) |
1868 |
n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times) |
1869 |
(C) group (expression C is grouped together) |
1870 |
[C] optional (C may or not occurs) |
1871 |
C+ one or more occurrences of C |
1872 |
{C}+ one or more occurrences of C |
1873 |
{C}* zero or more occurrences of C |
1874 |
{C} zero or more occurrences of C |
1875 |
C / D equivalent to: C {D C}* |
1876 |
{C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}* |
1877 |
{C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*] |
1878 |
{C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*] |
1879 |
|
1880 |
Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it. |
1881 |
|
1882 |
*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x |
1883 |
align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions, |
1884 |
determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for |
1885 |
example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the |
1886 |
equal signs of assignments. |
1887 |
|
1888 |
*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting |
1889 |
paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'. |
1890 |
|
1891 |
*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to |
1892 |
list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a |
1893 |
buffer menu with this package. See the Custom group `bs'. |
1894 |
|
1895 |
*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp. |
1896 |
|
1897 |
*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to |
1898 |
replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it |
1899 |
is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators, |
1900 |
and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should |
1901 |
not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool |
1902 |
which answers different needs. |
1903 |
|
1904 |
*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights |
1905 |
suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside |
1906 |
expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of |
1907 |
course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with |
1908 |
reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode |
1909 |
to be enabled. |
1910 |
|
1911 |
*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files |
1912 |
containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS. |
1913 |
|
1914 |
*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game. |
1915 |
|
1916 |
*** hl-line.el provides `hl-line-mode', a minor mode to highlight the |
1917 |
current line in the current buffer. It also provides |
1918 |
`global-hl-line-mode' to provide the same behaviour in all buffers. |
1919 |
|
1920 |
*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties. |
1921 |
|
1922 |
Please note: if `ansi-color-for-comint-mode' and |
1923 |
`global-font-lock-mode' are non-nil, loading ansi-color.el will |
1924 |
disable font-lock and add `ansi-color-apply' to |
1925 |
`comint-preoutput-filter-functions' for all shell-mode buffers. This |
1926 |
displays the output of "ls --color=yes" using the correct foreground |
1927 |
and background colors. |
1928 |
|
1929 |
*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object |
1930 |
Pascal) language. |
1931 |
|
1932 |
*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on |
1933 |
the text at point. |
1934 |
|
1935 |
*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases. |
1936 |
|
1937 |
*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures. |
1938 |
|
1939 |
*** whitespace.el is a package for warning about and cleaning bogus |
1940 |
whitespace in a file. |
1941 |
|
1942 |
*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript |
1943 |
files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including |
1944 |
(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for |
1945 |
interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and |
1946 |
often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out / |
1947 |
uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal |
1948 |
codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu. |
1949 |
|
1950 |
*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle. |
1951 |
|
1952 |
Here is an example of columns: |
1953 |
|
1954 |
horse apple bus |
1955 |
dog pineapple car EXTRA |
1956 |
porcupine strawberry airplane |
1957 |
|
1958 |
Doing the following settings: |
1959 |
|
1960 |
(setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ") |
1961 |
(setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]") |
1962 |
(setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ") |
1963 |
(setq delimit-columns-separator "\t") |
1964 |
|
1965 |
|
1966 |
Selecting the lines above and typing: |
1967 |
|
1968 |
M-x delimit-columns-region |
1969 |
|
1970 |
It results: |
1971 |
|
1972 |
[ horse , apple , bus , ] |
1973 |
[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ] |
1974 |
[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ] |
1975 |
|
1976 |
delim-col has the following options: |
1977 |
|
1978 |
delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted |
1979 |
before all columns. |
1980 |
|
1981 |
delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted |
1982 |
between each column. |
1983 |
|
1984 |
delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted |
1985 |
after all columns. |
1986 |
|
1987 |
delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates |
1988 |
each column. |
1989 |
|
1990 |
delim-col has the following commands: |
1991 |
|
1992 |
delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region. |
1993 |
delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle. |
1994 |
|
1995 |
*** Recentf mode maintains a menu for visiting files that were |
1996 |
operated on recently. User option recentf-menu-filter specifies a |
1997 |
menu filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the |
1998 |
recent file list can be displayed: |
1999 |
|
2000 |
- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules. |
2001 |
- sorted by file paths, file names, ascending or descending. |
2002 |
- showing paths relative to the current default-directory |
2003 |
|
2004 |
The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to |
2005 |
dynamically change the menu appearance. |
2006 |
|
2007 |
*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header |
2008 |
text. |
2009 |
|
2010 |
*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use |
2011 |
of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't |
2012 |
specific to Message mode. |
2013 |
|
2014 |
*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for |
2015 |
viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files |
2016 |
with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'. |
2017 |
|
2018 |
*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user |
2019 |
interface to access directory servers using different directory |
2020 |
protocols. It has a separate manual. |
2021 |
|
2022 |
*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files |
2023 |
for Autoconf, selected automatically. |
2024 |
|
2025 |
*** windmove.el provides moving between windows. |
2026 |
|
2027 |
*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the |
2028 |
minibuffer with completion. |
2029 |
|
2030 |
*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration |
2031 |
with the diary features. |
2032 |
|
2033 |
*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby |
2034 |
numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting. |
2035 |
|
2036 |
*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto |
2037 |
Fill mode. |
2038 |
|
2039 |
*** pcomplete.el is a library that provides programmable completion |
2040 |
facilities for Emacs, similar to what zsh and tcsh offer. The main |
2041 |
difference is that completion functions are written in Lisp, meaning |
2042 |
they can be profiled, debugged, etc. |
2043 |
|
2044 |
*** antlr-mode is a new major mode for editing ANTLR grammar files. |
2045 |
It is automatically turned on for files whose names have the extension |
2046 |
`.g'. |
2047 |
|
2048 |
** Changes in sort.el |
2049 |
|
2050 |
The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0' |
2051 |
as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The |
2052 |
new user-option sort-numeric-base can be used to specify a default |
2053 |
numeric base. |
2054 |
|
2055 |
** Changes to Ange-ftp |
2056 |
|
2057 |
*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file |
2058 |
names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash |
2059 |
sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.) |
2060 |
|
2061 |
*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive |
2062 |
ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that. |
2063 |
|
2064 |
*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which |
2065 |
output ^M at the end of lines. |
2066 |
|
2067 |
** The recommended way of using Iswitchb is via the new global minor |
2068 |
mode `iswitchb-mode'. |
2069 |
|
2070 |
** Just loading the msb package doesn't switch on Msb mode anymore. |
2071 |
If you have `(require 'msb)' in your .emacs, please replace it with |
2072 |
`(msb-mode 1)'. |
2073 |
|
2074 |
** Flyspell mode has various new options. See the `flyspell' Custom |
2075 |
group. |
2076 |
|
2077 |
** The user option `backward-delete-char-untabify-method' controls the |
2078 |
behavior of `backward-delete-char-untabify'. The following values |
2079 |
are recognized: |
2080 |
|
2081 |
`untabify' -- turn a tab to many spaces, then delete one space; |
2082 |
`hungry' -- delete all whitespace, both tabs and spaces; |
2083 |
`all' -- delete all whitespace, including tabs, spaces and newlines; |
2084 |
nil -- just delete one character. |
2085 |
|
2086 |
Default value is `untabify'. |
2087 |
|
2088 |
[This change was made in Emacs 20.3 but not mentioned then.] |
2089 |
|
2090 |
** In Cperl mode `cperl-invalid-face' should now be a normal face |
2091 |
symbol, not double-quoted. |
2092 |
|
2093 |
** Some packages are declared obsolete, to be removed in a future |
2094 |
version. They are: auto-show, c-mode, hilit19, hscroll, ooutline, |
2095 |
profile, rnews, rnewspost, and sc. Their implementations have been |
2096 |
moved to lisp/obsolete. |
2097 |
|
2098 |
** auto-compression mode is no longer enabled just by loading jka-compr.el. |
2099 |
To control it, set `auto-compression-mode' via Custom or use the |
2100 |
`auto-compression-mode' command. |
2101 |
|
2102 |
** `browse-url-gnome-moz' is a new option for |
2103 |
`browse-url-browser-function', invoking Mozilla in GNOME, and |
2104 |
`browse-url-kde' can be chosen for invoking the KDE browser. |
2105 |
|
2106 |
** The user-option `browse-url-new-window-p' has been renamed to |
2107 |
`browse-url-new-window-flag'. |
2108 |
|
2109 |
** The functions `keep-lines', `flush-lines' and `how-many' now |
2110 |
operate on the active region in Transient Mark mode. |
2111 |
|
2112 |
** `gnus-user-agent' is a new possibility for `mail-user-agent'. It |
2113 |
is like `message-user-agent', but with all the Gnus paraphernalia. |
2114 |
|
2115 |
** The Strokes package has been updated. If your Emacs has XPM |
2116 |
support, you can use it for pictographic editing. In Strokes mode, |
2117 |
use C-mouse-2 to compose a complex stoke and insert it into the |
2118 |
buffer. You can encode or decode a strokes buffer with new commands |
2119 |
M-x strokes-encode-buffer and M-x strokes-decode-buffer. There is a |
2120 |
new command M-x strokes-list-strokes. |
2121 |
|
2122 |
** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts |
2123 |
a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer. |
2124 |
|
2125 |
** Hexl mode allows to insert non-ASCII characters. |
2126 |
|
2127 |
The non-ASCII characters are encoded using the same encoding as the |
2128 |
file you are visiting in Hexl mode. |
2129 |
|
2130 |
** Shell script mode changes. |
2131 |
|
2132 |
Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells |
2133 |
derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizable, and |
2134 |
sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style. |
2135 |
|
2136 |
** Etags changes. |
2137 |
|
2138 |
*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c. |
2139 |
|
2140 |
*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now |
2141 |
possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with |
2142 |
{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out. |
2143 |
This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains |
2144 |
a regular expression. The manual contains details. |
2145 |
|
2146 |
*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function |
2147 |
declarations when given the --declarations option. |
2148 |
|
2149 |
*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form |
2150 |
"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator. |
2151 |
|
2152 |
*** You shouldn't generally need any more the -C or -c++ option: etags |
2153 |
automatically switches to C++ parsing when it meets the `class' or |
2154 |
`template' keywords. |
2155 |
|
2156 |
*** Etags now is able to delve at arbitrary deeps into nested structures in |
2157 |
C-like languages. Previously, it was limited to one or two brace levels. |
2158 |
|
2159 |
*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and |
2160 |
types. |
2161 |
|
2162 |
*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged. |
2163 |
|
2164 |
*** In Java, tags are created for "interface". |
2165 |
|
2166 |
*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs |
2167 |
are now tagged. |
2168 |
|
2169 |
*** In makefiles, tags the targets. |
2170 |
|
2171 |
*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local |
2172 |
variables are tagged. |
2173 |
|
2174 |
*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags. |
2175 |
|
2176 |
*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is |
2177 |
for PSWrap. |
2178 |
|
2179 |
** Changes in etags.el |
2180 |
|
2181 |
*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make |
2182 |
tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default |
2183 |
is to use the same setting as case-fold-search. |
2184 |
|
2185 |
*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting |
2186 |
the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions. |
2187 |
|
2188 |
If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE |
2189 |
FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes |
2190 |
TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist, |
2191 |
obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used. |
2192 |
|
2193 |
TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH. |
2194 |
|
2195 |
FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags |
2196 |
List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol. |
2197 |
|
2198 |
A useful example value for this variable might be something like: |
2199 |
|
2200 |
'(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray) |
2201 |
("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray) |
2202 |
("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray)) |
2203 |
|
2204 |
*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance |
2205 |
of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos. |
2206 |
|
2207 |
*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the |
2208 |
names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer. |
2209 |
|
2210 |
*** You can now search for tags that are part of the filename itself. |
2211 |
If you have tagged the files topfile.c subdir/subfile.c |
2212 |
/tmp/tempfile.c, you can now search for tags "topfile.c", "subfile.c", |
2213 |
"dir/sub", "tempfile", "tempfile.c". If the tag matches the file name, |
2214 |
point will go to the beginning of the file. |
2215 |
|
2216 |
*** Compressed files are now transparently supported if |
2217 |
auto-compression-mode is active. You can tag (with Etags) and search |
2218 |
(with find-tag) both compressed and uncompressed files. |
2219 |
|
2220 |
*** Tags commands like M-x tags-search no longer change point |
2221 |
in buffers where no match is found. In buffers where a match is |
2222 |
found, the original value of point is pushed on the marker ring. |
2223 |
|
2224 |
** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to |
2225 |
remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now |
2226 |
appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings. |
2227 |
|
2228 |
** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'. |
2229 |
|
2230 |
** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file. |
2231 |
|
2232 |
** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignored-regexps' |
2233 |
containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular |
2234 |
expression from that list, are not checked. |
2235 |
|
2236 |
** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files. |
2237 |
When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file, |
2238 |
and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert |
2239 |
the buffer, just like for the local files. |
2240 |
|
2241 |
** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer. |
2242 |
|
2243 |
** When invoked with a prefix argument, the command `list-abbrevs' now |
2244 |
displays local abbrevs, only. |
2245 |
|
2246 |
** Refill minor mode provides preliminary support for keeping |
2247 |
paragraphs filled as you modify them. |
2248 |
|
2249 |
** The variable `double-click-fuzz' specifies how much the mouse |
2250 |
may be moved between clicks that are recognized as a pair. Its value |
2251 |
is measured in pixels. |
2252 |
|
2253 |
** The new global minor mode `auto-image-file-mode' allows image files |
2254 |
to be visited as images. |
2255 |
|
2256 |
** Two new user-options `grep-command' and `grep-find-command' |
2257 |
were added to compile.el. |
2258 |
|
2259 |
** Withdrawn packages |
2260 |
|
2261 |
*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same |
2262 |
functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions. |
2263 |
|
2264 |
*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed. |
2265 |
|
2266 |
*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed. |
2267 |
|
2268 |
|
2269 |
* Incompatible Lisp changes |
2270 |
|
2271 |
There are a few Lisp changes which are not backwards-compatible and |
2272 |
may require changes to existing code. Here is a list for reference. |
2273 |
See the sections below for details. |
2274 |
|
2275 |
** Since `format' preserves text properties, the idiom |
2276 |
`(format "%s" foo)' no longer works to copy and remove properties. |
2277 |
Use `copy-sequence' to copy the string, then use `set-text-properties' |
2278 |
to remove the properties of the copy. |
2279 |
|
2280 |
** Since the `keymap' text property now has significance, some code |
2281 |
which uses both `local-map' and `keymap' properties (for portability) |
2282 |
may, for instance, give rise to duplicate menus when the keymaps from |
2283 |
these properties are active. |
2284 |
|
2285 |
** The change in the treatment of non-ASCII characters in search |
2286 |
ranges may affect some code. |
2287 |
|
2288 |
** A non-nil value for the LOCAL arg of add-hook makes the hook |
2289 |
buffer-local even if `make-local-hook' hasn't been called, which might |
2290 |
make a difference to some code. |
2291 |
|
2292 |
** The new treatment of the minibuffer prompt might affect code which |
2293 |
operates on the minibuffer. |
2294 |
|
2295 |
** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
2296 |
cause `no-conversion' and `emacs-mule-unix' coding systems to produce |
2297 |
different results when reading files with non-ASCII characters |
2298 |
(previously, both coding systems would produce the same results). |
2299 |
Specifically, `no-conversion' interprets each 8-bit byte as a separate |
2300 |
character. This makes `no-conversion' inappropriate for reading |
2301 |
multibyte text, e.g. buffers written to disk in their internal MULE |
2302 |
encoding (auto-saving does that, for example). If a Lisp program |
2303 |
reads such files with `no-conversion', each byte of the multibyte |
2304 |
sequence, including the MULE leading codes such as \201, is treated as |
2305 |
a separate character, which prevents them from being interpreted in |
2306 |
the buffer as multibyte characters. |
2307 |
|
2308 |
Therefore, Lisp programs that read files which contain the internal |
2309 |
MULE encoding should use `emacs-mule-unix'. `no-conversion' is only |
2310 |
appropriate for reading truly binary files. |
2311 |
|
2312 |
** Code that relies on the obsolete `before-change-function' and |
2313 |
`after-change-function' to detect buffer changes will now fail. Use |
2314 |
`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' instead. |
2315 |
|
2316 |
** Code that uses `concat' with integer args now gets an error, as |
2317 |
long promised. |
2318 |
|
2319 |
** The function base64-decode-string now always returns a unibyte |
2320 |
string. |
2321 |
|
2322 |
** Not a Lisp incompatibility as such but, with the introduction of |
2323 |
extra private charsets, there is now only one slot free for a new |
2324 |
dimension-2 private charset. User code which tries to add more than |
2325 |
one extra will fail unless you rebuild Emacs with some standard |
2326 |
charset(s) removed; that is probably inadvisable because it changes |
2327 |
the emacs-mule encoding. Also, files stored in the emacs-mule |
2328 |
encoding using Emacs 20 with additional private charsets defined will |
2329 |
probably not be read correctly by Emacs 21. |
2330 |
|
2331 |
** The variable `directory-sep-char' is slated for removal. |
2332 |
Not really a change (yet), but a projected one that you should be |
2333 |
aware of: The variable `directory-sep-char' is deprecated, and should |
2334 |
not be used. It was always ignored on GNU/Linux and Unix systems and |
2335 |
on MS-DOS, but the MS-Windows port tried to support it by adapting the |
2336 |
behavior of certain primitives to the value of this variable. It |
2337 |
turned out that such support cannot be reliable, so it was decided to |
2338 |
remove this variable in the near future. Lisp programs are well |
2339 |
advised not to set it to anything but '/', because any different value |
2340 |
will not have any effect when support for this variable is removed. |
2341 |
|
2342 |
|
2343 |
* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual, |
2344 |
(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.) |
2345 |
|
2346 |
** Function assq-delete-all replaces function assoc-delete-all. |
2347 |
|
2348 |
** The new function animate-string, from lisp/play/animate.el |
2349 |
allows the animated display of strings. |
2350 |
|
2351 |
** The new function `interactive-form' can be used to obtain the |
2352 |
interactive form of a function. |
2353 |
|
2354 |
** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies |
2355 |
between custom options. Example: |
2356 |
|
2357 |
(defcustom default-input-method nil |
2358 |
"*Default input method for multilingual text (a string). |
2359 |
This is the input method activated automatically by the command |
2360 |
`toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])." |
2361 |
:group 'mule |
2362 |
:type '(choice (const nil) string) |
2363 |
:set-after '(current-language-environment)) |
2364 |
|
2365 |
This specifies that default-input-method should be set after |
2366 |
current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears |
2367 |
first in a custom-set-variables statement. |
2368 |
|
2369 |
** The new hook `kbd-macro-termination-hook' is run at the end of |
2370 |
function execute-kbd-macro. Functions on this hook are called with no |
2371 |
args. The hook is run independent of how the macro was terminated |
2372 |
(signal or normal termination). |
2373 |
|
2374 |
** Functions `butlast' and `nbutlast' for removing trailing elements |
2375 |
from a list are now available without requiring the CL package. |
2376 |
|
2377 |
** The new user-option `even-window-heights' can be set to nil |
2378 |
to prevent `display-buffer' from evening out window heights. |
2379 |
|
2380 |
** The user-option `face-font-registry-alternatives' specifies |
2381 |
alternative font registry names to try when looking for a font. |
2382 |
|
2383 |
** Function `md5' calculates the MD5 "message digest"/"checksum". |
2384 |
|
2385 |
** Function `delete-frame' runs `delete-frame-hook' before actually |
2386 |
deleting the frame. The hook is called with one arg, the frame |
2387 |
being deleted. |
2388 |
|
2389 |
** `add-hook' now makes the hook local if called with a non-nil LOCAL arg. |
2390 |
|
2391 |
** The treatment of non-ASCII characters in search ranges has changed. |
2392 |
If a range in a regular expression or the arg of |
2393 |
skip-chars-forward/backward starts with a unibyte character C and ends |
2394 |
with a multibyte character C2, the range is divided into two: one is |
2395 |
C..?\377, the other is C1..C2, where C1 is the first character of C2's |
2396 |
charset. |
2397 |
|
2398 |
** The new function `display-message-or-buffer' displays a message in |
2399 |
the echo area or pops up a buffer, depending on the length of the |
2400 |
message. |
2401 |
|
2402 |
** The new macro `with-auto-compression-mode' allows evaluating an |
2403 |
expression with auto-compression-mode enabled. |
2404 |
|
2405 |
** In image specifications, `:heuristic-mask' has been replaced |
2406 |
with the more general `:mask' property. |
2407 |
|
2408 |
** Image specifications accept more `:conversion's. |
2409 |
|
2410 |
** A `?' can be used in a symbol name without escaping it with a |
2411 |
backslash. |
2412 |
|
2413 |
** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs |
2414 |
is running in batch mode. For example, |
2415 |
|
2416 |
(message "%s" (read t)) |
2417 |
|
2418 |
will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result |
2419 |
to standard output. |
2420 |
|
2421 |
** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list', |
2422 |
`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional. |
2423 |
|
2424 |
** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer' |
2425 |
will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new |
2426 |
frame or window. |
2427 |
|
2428 |
** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences |
2429 |
were added |
2430 |
|
2431 |
- Function: remove ELT SEQ |
2432 |
|
2433 |
Return a copy of SEQ with all occurrences of ELT removed. SEQ must be |
2434 |
a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'. |
2435 |
|
2436 |
- Function: remq ELT LIST |
2437 |
|
2438 |
Return a copy of LIST with all occurrences of ELT removed. The |
2439 |
comparison is done with `eq'. |
2440 |
|
2441 |
** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings. |
2442 |
|
2443 |
** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table |
2444 |
has been changed: WEAK can now have new values `key-or-value' and |
2445 |
`key-and-value', in addition the `nil', `key', `value', and `t'. |
2446 |
|
2447 |
** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string |
2448 |
without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may |
2449 |
convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary. |
2450 |
|
2451 |
** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function |
2452 |
or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string. |
2453 |
|
2454 |
** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the |
2455 |
function was declared obsolete. |
2456 |
|
2457 |
** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is |
2458 |
retained as an alias). |
2459 |
|
2460 |
** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs. |
2461 |
It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result |
2462 |
is automatically converted to Emacs' form. |
2463 |
|
2464 |
** The new function `window-list' has been defined |
2465 |
|
2466 |
- Function: window-list &optional FRAME WINDOW MINIBUF |
2467 |
|
2468 |
Return a list of windows on FRAME, starting with WINDOW. FRAME nil or |
2469 |
omitted means use the selected frame. WINDOW nil or omitted means use |
2470 |
the selected window. MINIBUF t means include the minibuffer window, |
2471 |
even if it isn't active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means include the |
2472 |
minibuffer window only if it's active. MINIBUF neither nil nor t |
2473 |
means never include the minibuffer window. |
2474 |
|
2475 |
** There's a new function `get-window-with-predicate' defined as follows |
2476 |
|
2477 |
- Function: get-window-with-predicate PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT |
2478 |
|
2479 |
Return a window satisfying PREDICATE. |
2480 |
|
2481 |
This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows', |
2482 |
calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as |
2483 |
argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil |
2484 |
value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is |
2485 |
returned. |
2486 |
|
2487 |
Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even |
2488 |
if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff |
2489 |
it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the |
2490 |
minibuffer even if it is active. |
2491 |
|
2492 |
Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer |
2493 |
counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count |
2494 |
too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame |
2495 |
and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts, |
2496 |
`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you |
2497 |
entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window. |
2498 |
|
2499 |
ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument. |
2500 |
ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above. |
2501 |
ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames. |
2502 |
ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames. |
2503 |
ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames. |
2504 |
If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame. |
2505 |
Anything else means restrict to the selected frame. |
2506 |
|
2507 |
** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and |
2508 |
event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional |
2509 |
argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed. |
2510 |
|
2511 |
** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a |
2512 |
call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that |
2513 |
message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x. |
2514 |
Default value is nil. |
2515 |
|
2516 |
** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil, |
2517 |
meaning no limit. |
2518 |
|
2519 |
** The new user option `line-number-display-limit-width' controls |
2520 |
the maximum width of lines in a buffer for which Emacs displays line |
2521 |
numbers in the mode line. The default is 200. |
2522 |
|
2523 |
** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred |
2524 |
coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and |
2525 |
DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified, |
2526 |
|
2527 |
** The function `subr-arity' provides information about the argument |
2528 |
list of a primitive. |
2529 |
|
2530 |
** `where-is-internal' now also accepts a list of keymaps. |
2531 |
|
2532 |
** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the |
2533 |
buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property. |
2534 |
This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather |
2535 |
than replacing the local map. |
2536 |
|
2537 |
** The obsolete variables `before-change-function' and |
2538 |
`after-change-function' are no longer acted upon and have been |
2539 |
removed. Use `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions' |
2540 |
instead. |
2541 |
|
2542 |
** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'. |
2543 |
|
2544 |
** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, |
2545 |
as promised long ago. |
2546 |
|
2547 |
** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float. |
2548 |
|
2549 |
** The new variable auto-coding-regexp-alist specifies coding systems |
2550 |
for reading specific files, analogous to auto-coding-alist, but |
2551 |
patterns are checked against file contents instead of file names. |
2552 |
|
2553 |
|
2554 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features) |
2555 |
|
2556 |
** The new package rx.el provides an alternative sexp notation for |
2557 |
regular expressions. |
2558 |
|
2559 |
- Function: rx-to-string SEXP |
2560 |
|
2561 |
Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. |
2562 |
|
2563 |
- Macro: rx SEXP |
2564 |
|
2565 |
Translate SEXP into a regular expression in string notation. |
2566 |
|
2567 |
The following are valid subforms of regular expressions in sexp |
2568 |
notation. |
2569 |
|
2570 |
STRING |
2571 |
matches string STRING literally. |
2572 |
|
2573 |
CHAR |
2574 |
matches character CHAR literally. |
2575 |
|
2576 |
`not-newline' |
2577 |
matches any character except a newline. |
2578 |
. |
2579 |
`anything' |
2580 |
matches any character |
2581 |
|
2582 |
`(any SET)' |
2583 |
matches any character in SET. SET may be a character or string. |
2584 |
Ranges of characters can be specified as `A-Z' in strings. |
2585 |
|
2586 |
'(in SET)' |
2587 |
like `any'. |
2588 |
|
2589 |
`(not (any SET))' |
2590 |
matches any character not in SET |
2591 |
|
2592 |
`line-start' |
2593 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of a line |
2594 |
in the text being matched |
2595 |
|
2596 |
`line-end' |
2597 |
is similar to `line-start' but matches only at the end of a line |
2598 |
|
2599 |
`string-start' |
2600 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the |
2601 |
string being matched against. |
2602 |
|
2603 |
`string-end' |
2604 |
matches the empty string, but only at the end of the |
2605 |
string being matched against. |
2606 |
|
2607 |
`buffer-start' |
2608 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning of the |
2609 |
buffer being matched against. |
2610 |
|
2611 |
`buffer-end' |
2612 |
matches the empty string, but only at the end of the |
2613 |
buffer being matched against. |
2614 |
|
2615 |
`point' |
2616 |
matches the empty string, but only at point. |
2617 |
|
2618 |
`word-start' |
2619 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a |
2620 |
word. |
2621 |
|
2622 |
`word-end' |
2623 |
matches the empty string, but only at the end of a word. |
2624 |
|
2625 |
`word-boundary' |
2626 |
matches the empty string, but only at the beginning or end of a |
2627 |
word. |
2628 |
|
2629 |
`(not word-boundary)' |
2630 |
matches the empty string, but not at the beginning or end of a |
2631 |
word. |
2632 |
|
2633 |
`digit' |
2634 |
matches 0 through 9. |
2635 |
|
2636 |
`control' |
2637 |
matches ASCII control characters. |
2638 |
|
2639 |
`hex-digit' |
2640 |
matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
2641 |
|
2642 |
`blank' |
2643 |
matches space and tab only. |
2644 |
|
2645 |
`graphic' |
2646 |
matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
2647 |
space, and DEL. |
2648 |
|
2649 |
`printing' |
2650 |
matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
2651 |
and DEL. |
2652 |
|
2653 |
`alphanumeric' |
2654 |
matches letters and digits. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
2655 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
2656 |
|
2657 |
`letter' |
2658 |
matches letters. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
2659 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
2660 |
|
2661 |
`ascii' |
2662 |
matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
2663 |
|
2664 |
`nonascii' |
2665 |
matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
2666 |
|
2667 |
`lower' |
2668 |
matches anything lower-case. |
2669 |
|
2670 |
`upper' |
2671 |
matches anything upper-case. |
2672 |
|
2673 |
`punctuation' |
2674 |
matches punctuation. (But at present, for multibyte characters, |
2675 |
it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
2676 |
|
2677 |
`space' |
2678 |
matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
2679 |
|
2680 |
`word' |
2681 |
matches anything that has word syntax. |
2682 |
|
2683 |
`(syntax SYNTAX)' |
2684 |
matches a character with syntax SYNTAX. SYNTAX must be one |
2685 |
of the following symbols. |
2686 |
|
2687 |
`whitespace' (\\s- in string notation) |
2688 |
`punctuation' (\\s.) |
2689 |
`word' (\\sw) |
2690 |
`symbol' (\\s_) |
2691 |
`open-parenthesis' (\\s() |
2692 |
`close-parenthesis' (\\s)) |
2693 |
`expression-prefix' (\\s') |
2694 |
`string-quote' (\\s\") |
2695 |
`paired-delimiter' (\\s$) |
2696 |
`escape' (\\s\\) |
2697 |
`character-quote' (\\s/) |
2698 |
`comment-start' (\\s<) |
2699 |
`comment-end' (\\s>) |
2700 |
|
2701 |
`(not (syntax SYNTAX))' |
2702 |
matches a character that has not syntax SYNTAX. |
2703 |
|
2704 |
`(category CATEGORY)' |
2705 |
matches a character with category CATEGORY. CATEGORY must be |
2706 |
either a character to use for C, or one of the following symbols. |
2707 |
|
2708 |
`consonant' (\\c0 in string notation) |
2709 |
`base-vowel' (\\c1) |
2710 |
`upper-diacritical-mark' (\\c2) |
2711 |
`lower-diacritical-mark' (\\c3) |
2712 |
`tone-mark' (\\c4) |
2713 |
`symbol' (\\c5) |
2714 |
`digit' (\\c6) |
2715 |
`vowel-modifying-diacritical-mark' (\\c7) |
2716 |
`vowel-sign' (\\c8) |
2717 |
`semivowel-lower' (\\c9) |
2718 |
`not-at-end-of-line' (\\c<) |
2719 |
`not-at-beginning-of-line' (\\c>) |
2720 |
`alpha-numeric-two-byte' (\\cA) |
2721 |
`chinse-two-byte' (\\cC) |
2722 |
`greek-two-byte' (\\cG) |
2723 |
`japanese-hiragana-two-byte' (\\cH) |
2724 |
`indian-tow-byte' (\\cI) |
2725 |
`japanese-katakana-two-byte' (\\cK) |
2726 |
`korean-hangul-two-byte' (\\cN) |
2727 |
`cyrillic-two-byte' (\\cY) |
2728 |
`ascii' (\\ca) |
2729 |
`arabic' (\\cb) |
2730 |
`chinese' (\\cc) |
2731 |
`ethiopic' (\\ce) |
2732 |
`greek' (\\cg) |
2733 |
`korean' (\\ch) |
2734 |
`indian' (\\ci) |
2735 |
`japanese' (\\cj) |
2736 |
`japanese-katakana' (\\ck) |
2737 |
`latin' (\\cl) |
2738 |
`lao' (\\co) |
2739 |
`tibetan' (\\cq) |
2740 |
`japanese-roman' (\\cr) |
2741 |
`thai' (\\ct) |
2742 |
`vietnamese' (\\cv) |
2743 |
`hebrew' (\\cw) |
2744 |
`cyrillic' (\\cy) |
2745 |
`can-break' (\\c|) |
2746 |
|
2747 |
`(not (category CATEGORY))' |
2748 |
matches a character that has not category CATEGORY. |
2749 |
|
2750 |
`(and SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
2751 |
matches what SEXP1 matches, followed by what SEXP2 matches, etc. |
2752 |
|
2753 |
`(submatch SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
2754 |
like `and', but makes the match accessible with `match-end', |
2755 |
`match-beginning', and `match-string'. |
2756 |
|
2757 |
`(group SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
2758 |
another name for `submatch'. |
2759 |
|
2760 |
`(or SEXP1 SEXP2 ...)' |
2761 |
matches anything that matches SEXP1 or SEXP2, etc. If all |
2762 |
args are strings, use `regexp-opt' to optimize the resulting |
2763 |
regular expression. |
2764 |
|
2765 |
`(minimal-match SEXP)' |
2766 |
produce a non-greedy regexp for SEXP. Normally, regexps matching |
2767 |
zero or more occurrences of something are \"greedy\" in that they |
2768 |
match as much as they can, as long as the overall regexp can |
2769 |
still match. A non-greedy regexp matches as little as possible. |
2770 |
|
2771 |
`(maximal-match SEXP)' |
2772 |
produce a greedy regexp for SEXP. This is the default. |
2773 |
|
2774 |
`(zero-or-more SEXP)' |
2775 |
matches zero or more occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
2776 |
|
2777 |
`(0+ SEXP)' |
2778 |
like `zero-or-more'. |
2779 |
|
2780 |
`(* SEXP)' |
2781 |
like `zero-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
2782 |
|
2783 |
`(*? SEXP)' |
2784 |
like `zero-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
2785 |
|
2786 |
`(one-or-more SEXP)' |
2787 |
matches one or more occurrences of A. |
2788 |
|
2789 |
`(1+ SEXP)' |
2790 |
like `one-or-more'. |
2791 |
|
2792 |
`(+ SEXP)' |
2793 |
like `one-or-more', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
2794 |
|
2795 |
`(+? SEXP)' |
2796 |
like `one-or-more', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
2797 |
|
2798 |
`(zero-or-one SEXP)' |
2799 |
matches zero or one occurrences of A. |
2800 |
|
2801 |
`(optional SEXP)' |
2802 |
like `zero-or-one'. |
2803 |
|
2804 |
`(? SEXP)' |
2805 |
like `zero-or-one', but always produces a greedy regexp. |
2806 |
|
2807 |
`(?? SEXP)' |
2808 |
like `zero-or-one', but always produces a non-greedy regexp. |
2809 |
|
2810 |
`(repeat N SEXP)' |
2811 |
matches N occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
2812 |
|
2813 |
`(repeat N M SEXP)' |
2814 |
matches N to M occurrences of what SEXP matches. |
2815 |
|
2816 |
`(eval FORM)' |
2817 |
evaluate FORM and insert result. If result is a string, |
2818 |
`regexp-quote' it. |
2819 |
|
2820 |
`(regexp REGEXP)' |
2821 |
include REGEXP in string notation in the result. |
2822 |
|
2823 |
*** The features `md5' and `overlay' are now provided by default. |
2824 |
|
2825 |
*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the |
2826 |
buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside |
2827 |
the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved |
2828 |
restriction to be restored incorrectly. |
2829 |
|
2830 |
*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include |
2831 |
`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list |
2832 |
when they find 8-bit characters. Previously, they included `ascii' in a |
2833 |
multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer. |
2834 |
|
2835 |
*** The functions `set-buffer-multibyte', `string-as-multibyte' and |
2836 |
`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer or a string |
2837 |
if it contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set. |
2838 |
|
2839 |
*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is |
2840 |
changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern |
2841 |
[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character |
2842 |
regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if |
2843 |
the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the |
2844 |
extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra |
2845 |
bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset |
2846 |
eight-bit-graphic. |
2847 |
|
2848 |
** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables. |
2849 |
|
2850 |
A fontset can now be specified for each independent character, for |
2851 |
a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a |
2852 |
character set as previously. |
2853 |
|
2854 |
*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed. |
2855 |
They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function |
2856 |
modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER. |
2857 |
|
2858 |
CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic |
2859 |
characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the |
2860 |
range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that |
2861 |
case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset. |
2862 |
|
2863 |
FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family |
2864 |
name of a font and REGISTRY is a registry name of a font. |
2865 |
|
2866 |
*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset |
2867 |
registries of character sets are set in the default fontset |
2868 |
"fontset-default". |
2869 |
|
2870 |
*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second |
2871 |
argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets. |
2872 |
|
2873 |
** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character |
2874 |
composition is done by a special text property `composition' in |
2875 |
buffers and strings. |
2876 |
|
2877 |
*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite |
2878 |
character' which is an independent character with a unique character |
2879 |
code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters' |
2880 |
have been deleted: composite-char-component, |
2881 |
composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule, |
2882 |
composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete. |
2883 |
The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have |
2884 |
also been deleted. |
2885 |
|
2886 |
*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to |
2887 |
specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable |
2888 |
`reference-point-alist' for more detail. |
2889 |
|
2890 |
*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and |
2891 |
MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a |
2892 |
composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters |
2893 |
may differ between buffer and string text. |
2894 |
|
2895 |
*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END, |
2896 |
COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC. |
2897 |
|
2898 |
*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition' |
2899 |
directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string. |
2900 |
Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property |
2901 |
`composition' from STRING. |
2902 |
|
2903 |
*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about |
2904 |
a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string. |
2905 |
|
2906 |
*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as |
2907 |
obsolete. |
2908 |
|
2909 |
** The new coding system `mac-roman' is primarily intended for use on |
2910 |
the Macintosh but may be used generally for Macintosh-encoded text. |
2911 |
|
2912 |
** The new character sets `mule-unicode-0100-24ff', |
2913 |
`mule-unicode-2500-33ff', and `mule-unicode-e000-ffff' have been |
2914 |
introduced for Unicode characters in the range U+0100..U+24FF, |
2915 |
U+2500..U+33FF, U+E000..U+FFFF respectively. |
2916 |
|
2917 |
Note that the character sets are not yet unified in Emacs, so |
2918 |
characters which belong to charsets such as Latin-2, Greek, Hebrew, |
2919 |
etc. and the same characters in the `mule-unicode-*' charsets are |
2920 |
different characters, as far as Emacs is concerned. For example, text |
2921 |
which includes Unicode characters from the Latin-2 locale cannot be |
2922 |
encoded by Emacs with ISO 8859-2 coding system. |
2923 |
|
2924 |
** The new coding system `mule-utf-8' has been added. |
2925 |
It provides limited support for decoding/encoding UTF-8 text. For |
2926 |
details, please see the documentation string of this coding system. |
2927 |
|
2928 |
** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and |
2929 |
`japanese-jisx0213-2' have been introduced for the new Japanese |
2930 |
standard JIS X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2. |
2931 |
|
2932 |
** The new character sets `latin-iso8859-14' and `latin-iso8859-15' |
2933 |
have been introduced. |
2934 |
|
2935 |
** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic' |
2936 |
have been introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and |
2937 |
0xA0..0xFF respectively. Note that the multibyte representation of |
2938 |
eight-bit-control is never exposed; this leads to an exception in the |
2939 |
emacs-mule coding system, which encodes everything else to the |
2940 |
buffer/string internal representation. Note that to search for |
2941 |
eight-bit-graphic characters in a multibyte buffer, the search string |
2942 |
must be multibyte, otherwise such characters will be converted to |
2943 |
their multibyte equivalent. |
2944 |
|
2945 |
** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to |
2946 |
that offset in the file before writing. |
2947 |
|
2948 |
** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and |
2949 |
compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode). |
2950 |
|
2951 |
** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the |
2952 |
`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer |
2953 |
from which the command was issued. |
2954 |
|
2955 |
** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp', |
2956 |
`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp', |
2957 |
`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two |
2958 |
additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to |
2959 |
operate on. |
2960 |
|
2961 |
** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative |
2962 |
to `window-buffer-height'. |
2963 |
|
2964 |
- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW |
2965 |
|
2966 |
Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END. |
2967 |
The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual |
2968 |
lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc. |
2969 |
|
2970 |
Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max' |
2971 |
respectively. |
2972 |
|
2973 |
If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optional third argument |
2974 |
COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil. |
2975 |
|
2976 |
The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for |
2977 |
obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so |
2978 |
on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters. |
2979 |
|
2980 |
Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current |
2981 |
buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes |
2982 |
possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it |
2983 |
is currently displayed in some window. |
2984 |
|
2985 |
** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the |
2986 |
argument function's results. |
2987 |
|
2988 |
** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now |
2989 |
signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails. Also, |
2990 |
`base64-decode-string' now always returns a unibyte string (in Emacs |
2991 |
20, it returned a multibyte string when the result was a valid multibyte |
2992 |
sequence). |
2993 |
|
2994 |
** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body' |
2995 |
header in the list of headers passed to it. |
2996 |
|
2997 |
** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but |
2998 |
ignores differences in case and text representation. |
2999 |
|
3000 |
** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the |
3001 |
cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted |
3002 |
as follows: |
3003 |
|
3004 |
t use the cursor specified for the frame (default) |
3005 |
nil don't display a cursor |
3006 |
`bar' display a bar cursor with default width |
3007 |
(bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH |
3008 |
others display a box cursor. |
3009 |
|
3010 |
** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether |
3011 |
an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a |
3012 |
defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not |
3013 |
set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning. |
3014 |
|
3015 |
** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax |
3016 |
specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to |
3017 |
the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table' |
3018 |
text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'. |
3019 |
|
3020 |
Example: |
3021 |
|
3022 |
(string-to-syntax "()") |
3023 |
=> (4 . 41) |
3024 |
|
3025 |
** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases |
3026 |
other than 10. |
3027 |
|
3028 |
*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2). |
3029 |
INTEGER optionally contains a sign. |
3030 |
|
3031 |
#b1111 |
3032 |
=> 15 |
3033 |
#b-1111 |
3034 |
=> -15 |
3035 |
|
3036 |
*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8). |
3037 |
|
3038 |
#o666 |
3039 |
=> 438 |
3040 |
|
3041 |
*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16). |
3042 |
|
3043 |
#xbeef |
3044 |
=> 48815 |
3045 |
|
3046 |
*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36. |
3047 |
|
3048 |
#2R-111 |
3049 |
=> -7 |
3050 |
#25rah |
3051 |
=> 267 |
3052 |
|
3053 |
** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of |
3054 |
the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC |
3055 |
and isn't a string. |
3056 |
|
3057 |
** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for |
3058 |
a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil |
3059 |
value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is |
3060 |
not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string. |
3061 |
|
3062 |
** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience. |
3063 |
|
3064 |
** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches |
3065 |
for a regexp in a string. |
3066 |
|
3067 |
** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook |
3068 |
`mouse-position-function'. |
3069 |
|
3070 |
** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers |
3071 |
that don't fit into a Lisp integer. |
3072 |
|
3073 |
** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed. |
3074 |
Keywords are now always considered constants. |
3075 |
|
3076 |
** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and |
3077 |
returns it. |
3078 |
|
3079 |
** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector |
3080 |
returned by function `recent-keys'. |
3081 |
|
3082 |
** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function' |
3083 |
can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns. |
3084 |
Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding C-M-a |
3085 |
etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the |
3086 |
mode. |
3087 |
|
3088 |
** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument |
3089 |
and is renamed `define-minor-mode'. |
3090 |
|
3091 |
** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol |
3092 |
has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook |
3093 |
function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it |
3094 |
returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has |
3095 |
been performed." |
3096 |
|
3097 |
When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character, |
3098 |
and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the |
3099 |
hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done, |
3100 |
then the self-inserting character is not inserted. |
3101 |
|
3102 |
** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument. |
3103 |
In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray, |
3104 |
and the function's value is nil if it is not found. |
3105 |
|
3106 |
** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms |
3107 |
with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a |
3108 |
specified table. |
3109 |
|
3110 |
(with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY) |
3111 |
|
3112 |
Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of |
3113 |
TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the |
3114 |
saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is |
3115 |
what BODY returns. |
3116 |
|
3117 |
** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as |
3118 |
Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators. |
3119 |
Also back-references like \2 are now considered as an error if the |
3120 |
corresponding subgroup does not exist (or is not closed yet). |
3121 |
Previously it would have been silently turned into `2' (ignoring the `\'). |
3122 |
|
3123 |
** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been |
3124 |
removed since it wasn't used by anything. |
3125 |
|
3126 |
** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required |
3127 |
instead of being optional. |
3128 |
|
3129 |
** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to |
3130 |
modify read-only text. |
3131 |
|
3132 |
** New functions and variables for locales. |
3133 |
|
3134 |
The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and |
3135 |
decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and |
3136 |
time functions like strftime. The new variables |
3137 |
`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system |
3138 |
locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions. |
3139 |
|
3140 |
The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language |
3141 |
environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from |
3142 |
the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG |
3143 |
environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need |
3144 |
not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables |
3145 |
`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and |
3146 |
`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions. |
3147 |
|
3148 |
** syntax tables now understand nested comments. |
3149 |
To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n' |
3150 |
modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment |
3151 |
start sequences. |
3152 |
|
3153 |
** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p' |
3154 |
because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology. |
3155 |
|
3156 |
** New function `propertize' |
3157 |
|
3158 |
The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct |
3159 |
strings with text properties. |
3160 |
|
3161 |
- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES |
3162 |
|
3163 |
Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified |
3164 |
by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with |
3165 |
PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the |
3166 |
specified value of that property. Example: |
3167 |
|
3168 |
(propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t) |
3169 |
|
3170 |
** push and pop macros. |
3171 |
|
3172 |
Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp |
3173 |
are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols |
3174 |
as the place that holds the list to be changed. |
3175 |
|
3176 |
(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value. |
3177 |
(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it |
3178 |
(thus altering the value of LISTNAME). |
3179 |
|
3180 |
** New dolist and dotimes macros. |
3181 |
|
3182 |
Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp |
3183 |
are now defined in Emacs Lisp. |
3184 |
|
3185 |
(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...) |
3186 |
Execute body once for each element of LIST, |
3187 |
using the variable VAR to hold the current element. |
3188 |
Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
3189 |
|
3190 |
(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...) |
3191 |
Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0, |
3192 |
inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive. |
3193 |
Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted. |
3194 |
|
3195 |
** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such as |
3196 |
[:alpha:], [:space:] and so on. These must be used within a character |
3197 |
class--for instance, [-[:digit:].+] matches digits or a period |
3198 |
or a sign. |
3199 |
|
3200 |
[:digit:] matches 0 through 9 |
3201 |
[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters |
3202 |
[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F. |
3203 |
[:blank:] matches space and tab only |
3204 |
[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars, |
3205 |
space, and DEL. |
3206 |
[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars |
3207 |
and DEL. |
3208 |
[:alnum:] matches letters and digits. |
3209 |
(But at present, for multibyte characters, |
3210 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
3211 |
[:alpha:] matches letters. |
3212 |
(But at present, for multibyte characters, |
3213 |
it matches anything that has word syntax.) |
3214 |
[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters. |
3215 |
[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters. |
3216 |
[:lower:] matches anything lower-case. |
3217 |
[:punct:] matches punctuation. |
3218 |
(But at present, for multibyte characters, |
3219 |
it matches anything that has non-word syntax.) |
3220 |
[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax. |
3221 |
[:upper:] matches anything upper-case. |
3222 |
[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax. |
3223 |
|
3224 |
** Emacs now has built-in hash tables. |
3225 |
|
3226 |
The following functions are defined for hash tables: |
3227 |
|
3228 |
- Function: make-hash-table ARGS |
3229 |
|
3230 |
The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments |
3231 |
are optional. The following arguments are defined: |
3232 |
|
3233 |
:test TEST |
3234 |
|
3235 |
TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'. |
3236 |
Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined, |
3237 |
it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'. |
3238 |
|
3239 |
:size SIZE |
3240 |
|
3241 |
SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how |
3242 |
many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65. |
3243 |
|
3244 |
:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE |
3245 |
|
3246 |
REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes |
3247 |
full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old |
3248 |
size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float > |
3249 |
1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the |
3250 |
old size. Default rehash size is 1.5. |
3251 |
|
3252 |
:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD |
3253 |
|
3254 |
THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the |
3255 |
hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) / |
3256 |
(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8. |
3257 |
|
3258 |
:weakness WEAK |
3259 |
|
3260 |
WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', |
3261 |
`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as |
3262 |
`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage |
3263 |
collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere |
3264 |
outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables. |
3265 |
|
3266 |
- Function: makehash &optional TEST |
3267 |
|
3268 |
Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified. |
3269 |
|
3270 |
- Function: hash-table-p TABLE |
3271 |
|
3272 |
Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object. |
3273 |
|
3274 |
- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE |
3275 |
|
3276 |
Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and |
3277 |
values are shared. |
3278 |
|
3279 |
- Function: hash-table-count TABLE |
3280 |
|
3281 |
Returns the number of entries in TABLE. |
3282 |
|
3283 |
- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
3284 |
|
3285 |
Returns the rehash size of TABLE. |
3286 |
|
3287 |
- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE |
3288 |
|
3289 |
Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE. |
3290 |
|
3291 |
- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE |
3292 |
|
3293 |
Returns the size of TABLE. |
3294 |
|
3295 |
- Function: hash-table-test TABLE |
3296 |
|
3297 |
Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys. |
3298 |
|
3299 |
- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE |
3300 |
|
3301 |
Returns the weakness specified for TABLE. |
3302 |
|
3303 |
- Function: clrhash TABLE |
3304 |
|
3305 |
Clear TABLE. |
3306 |
|
3307 |
- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT |
3308 |
|
3309 |
Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if |
3310 |
not found. |
3311 |
|
3312 |
- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE |
3313 |
|
3314 |
Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with |
3315 |
another value, replace the old value with VALUE. |
3316 |
|
3317 |
- Function: remhash KEY TABLE |
3318 |
|
3319 |
Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there. |
3320 |
|
3321 |
- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE |
3322 |
|
3323 |
Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two |
3324 |
arguments KEY and VALUE. |
3325 |
|
3326 |
- Function: sxhash OBJ |
3327 |
|
3328 |
Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ. |
3329 |
|
3330 |
- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN |
3331 |
|
3332 |
Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as |
3333 |
a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for |
3334 |
comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test |
3335 |
and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test' |
3336 |
of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN). |
3337 |
|
3338 |
TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same. |
3339 |
|
3340 |
HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash |
3341 |
code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of |
3342 |
integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers. |
3343 |
|
3344 |
Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to |
3345 |
be strings that are compared case-insensitively. |
3346 |
|
3347 |
(defun case-fold-string= (a b) |
3348 |
(compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t)) |
3349 |
|
3350 |
(defun case-fold-string-hash (a) |
3351 |
(sxhash (upcase a))) |
3352 |
|
3353 |
(define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string= |
3354 |
'case-fold-string-hash)) |
3355 |
|
3356 |
(make-hash-table :test 'case-fold) |
3357 |
|
3358 |
** The Lisp reader handles circular structure. |
3359 |
|
3360 |
It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent |
3361 |
circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents |
3362 |
a cons cell which is its own cdr. |
3363 |
|
3364 |
** The Lisp printer handles circular structure. |
3365 |
|
3366 |
If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs |
3367 |
#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure. |
3368 |
|
3369 |
** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or |
3370 |
t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the |
3371 |
specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it |
3372 |
is too short to reach that column. |
3373 |
|
3374 |
** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may |
3375 |
now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION |
3376 |
after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with |
3377 |
two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made. |
3378 |
|
3379 |
If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters, |
3380 |
perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily |
3381 |
and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it. |
3382 |
|
3383 |
** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument |
3384 |
to specify which buffer to return the size of. |
3385 |
|
3386 |
** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook |
3387 |
calendar-move-hook after moving point. |
3388 |
|
3389 |
** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a |
3390 |
directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be |
3391 |
small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If |
3392 |
small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use |
3393 |
temporary-file-directory instead. |
3394 |
|
3395 |
** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all |
3396 |
the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects |
3397 |
`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as |
3398 |
hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties. |
3399 |
|
3400 |
** assq-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the |
3401 |
elements of an alist which have a car `eq' to a particular value. |
3402 |
|
3403 |
** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file. |
3404 |
|
3405 |
make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually |
3406 |
creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error, |
3407 |
ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file. |
3408 |
|
3409 |
** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region' |
3410 |
|
3411 |
The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists |
3412 |
on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW |
3413 |
is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists; |
3414 |
never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means |
3415 |
ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and |
3416 |
overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation. |
3417 |
|
3418 |
If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl', |
3419 |
that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call |
3420 |
to get an error if the file exists at that time. |
3421 |
The error reported is `file-already-exists'. |
3422 |
|
3423 |
** Function `format' now handles text properties. |
3424 |
|
3425 |
Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string. |
3426 |
If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties |
3427 |
ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the |
3428 |
result string. |
3429 |
|
3430 |
Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result |
3431 |
string where arguments appear in the result string. |
3432 |
|
3433 |
Example: |
3434 |
|
3435 |
(let ((s1 "hello, %s") |
3436 |
(s2 "world")) |
3437 |
(put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1) |
3438 |
(put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2) |
3439 |
(format s1 s2)) |
3440 |
|
3441 |
results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end. |
3442 |
|
3443 |
** Messages can now be displayed with text properties. |
3444 |
|
3445 |
Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'. |
3446 |
The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic |
3447 |
argument in it. |
3448 |
|
3449 |
(let ((msg "hello, %s!") |
3450 |
(arg "world")) |
3451 |
(put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg) |
3452 |
(put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg) |
3453 |
(message msg arg)) |
3454 |
|
3455 |
** Sound support |
3456 |
|
3457 |
Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs |
3458 |
(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver). |
3459 |
|
3460 |
Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio |
3461 |
(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes' |
3462 |
to enable sound support. |
3463 |
|
3464 |
Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a |
3465 |
list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined |
3466 |
when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The |
3467 |
functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the |
3468 |
sound to play, before playing the sound. |
3469 |
|
3470 |
The following sound properties are supported: |
3471 |
|
3472 |
- `:file FILE' |
3473 |
|
3474 |
FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be |
3475 |
searched relative to `data-directory'. |
3476 |
|
3477 |
- `:data DATA' |
3478 |
|
3479 |
DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data |
3480 |
may be present, but not both. |
3481 |
|
3482 |
- `:volume VOLUME' |
3483 |
|
3484 |
VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range |
3485 |
0..1. This property is optional. |
3486 |
|
3487 |
- `:device DEVICE' |
3488 |
|
3489 |
DEVICE is a string specifying the system device on which to play the |
3490 |
sound. The default device is system-dependent. |
3491 |
|
3492 |
Other properties are ignored. |
3493 |
|
3494 |
An alternative interface is called as |
3495 |
(play-sound-file FILE &optional VOLUME DEVICE). |
3496 |
|
3497 |
** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group. |
3498 |
|
3499 |
** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being |
3500 |
a keyword symbol. |
3501 |
|
3502 |
** Changes to garbage collection |
3503 |
|
3504 |
*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number |
3505 |
of live and free strings. |
3506 |
|
3507 |
*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of |
3508 |
strings that have been consed so far. |
3509 |
|
3510 |
|
3511 |
* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs |
3512 |
Lisp Manual |
3513 |
|
3514 |
** The user-option `resize-mini-windows' controls how Emacs resizes |
3515 |
mini-windows. |
3516 |
|
3517 |
** The function `pos-visible-in-window-p' now has a third optional |
3518 |
argument, PARTIALLY. If a character is only partially visible, nil is |
3519 |
returned, unless PARTIALLY is non-nil. |
3520 |
|
3521 |
** On window systems, `glyph-table' is no longer used. |
3522 |
|
3523 |
** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text. |
3524 |
|
3525 |
** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an |
3526 |
image. |
3527 |
|
3528 |
- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME |
3529 |
|
3530 |
Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT). |
3531 |
|
3532 |
SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes |
3533 |
measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical |
3534 |
character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default |
3535 |
font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. |
3536 |
FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame. |
3537 |
|
3538 |
** The function `image-mask-p' can be used to determine if an image |
3539 |
has a mask bitmap. |
3540 |
|
3541 |
- Function: image-mask-p SPEC &optional FRAME |
3542 |
|
3543 |
Return t if image SPEC has a mask bitmap. |
3544 |
FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed. FRAME nil |
3545 |
or omitted means use the selected frame. |
3546 |
|
3547 |
** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image |
3548 |
satisfying one of a list of specifications. |
3549 |
|
3550 |
** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now |
3551 |
optional. |
3552 |
|
3553 |
** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center' (see |
3554 |
below). |
3555 |
|
3556 |
|
3557 |
* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1 |
3558 |
|
3559 |
** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used |
3560 |
to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs. |
3561 |
|
3562 |
Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying |
3563 |
text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground |
3564 |
is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on |
3565 |
your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on |
3566 |
laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to |
3567 |
just display it black instead. |
3568 |
|
3569 |
This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put |
3570 |
a line like |
3571 |
|
3572 |
(tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t) |
3573 |
|
3574 |
in your `.emacs'. |
3575 |
|
3576 |
** New face implementation. |
3577 |
|
3578 |
Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD |
3579 |
font names anymore and face merging now works as expected. |
3580 |
|
3581 |
*** New faces. |
3582 |
|
3583 |
Each face can specify the following display attributes: |
3584 |
|
3585 |
1. Font family or fontset alias name. |
3586 |
|
3587 |
2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set |
3588 |
width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'. |
3589 |
|
3590 |
3. Font height in 1/10pt |
3591 |
|
3592 |
4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'. |
3593 |
|
3594 |
5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'. |
3595 |
|
3596 |
6. Foreground color. |
3597 |
|
3598 |
7. Background color. |
3599 |
|
3600 |
8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color. |
3601 |
|
3602 |
9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video. |
3603 |
|
3604 |
10. A background stipple, a bitmap. |
3605 |
|
3606 |
11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color. |
3607 |
|
3608 |
12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what |
3609 |
color. |
3610 |
|
3611 |
13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its |
3612 |
color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance. |
3613 |
|
3614 |
Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the |
3615 |
same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different |
3616 |
frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named |
3617 |
faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector |
3618 |
with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each of the face |
3619 |
attributes mentioned above. |
3620 |
|
3621 |
There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face |
3622 |
definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly |
3623 |
created frames. |
3624 |
|
3625 |
A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified |
3626 |
have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called |
3627 |
`fully-specified'. |
3628 |
|
3629 |
*** Face merging. |
3630 |
|
3631 |
The display style of a given character in the text is determined by |
3632 |
combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any |
3633 |
aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text |
3634 |
properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure |
3635 |
that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always |
3636 |
results in a fully-specified face. |
3637 |
|
3638 |
*** Face realization. |
3639 |
|
3640 |
After all face attributes for a character have been determined by |
3641 |
merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The |
3642 |
realization process maps face attributes to what is physically |
3643 |
available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized |
3644 |
face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face |
3645 |
cache of the frame on which it was realized. |
3646 |
|
3647 |
Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the |
3648 |
character to display because different fonts and encodings are used |
3649 |
for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different |
3650 |
charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them. |
3651 |
|
3652 |
Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a |
3653 |
specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face |
3654 |
being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of |
3655 |
the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with |
3656 |
statically defined font name patterns in fontsets. |
3657 |
|
3658 |
In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function |
3659 |
`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those > |
3660 |
0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from |
3661 |
the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is |
3662 |
initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for |
3663 |
Emacs. |
3664 |
|
3665 |
Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with |
3666 |
`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same |
3667 |
registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent |
3668 |
with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only. |
3669 |
|
3670 |
**** Clearing face caches. |
3671 |
|
3672 |
The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches |
3673 |
on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload |
3674 |
unused fonts. |
3675 |
|
3676 |
*** Font selection. |
3677 |
|
3678 |
Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a |
3679 |
given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently |
3680 |
for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name. |
3681 |
|
3682 |
If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a |
3683 |
pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font |
3684 |
family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a |
3685 |
property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to |
3686 |
an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed. |
3687 |
|
3688 |
Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched |
3689 |
against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best |
3690 |
match for the given face attributes in this font list. |
3691 |
|
3692 |
Font selection can be influenced by the user. |
3693 |
|
3694 |
The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face |
3695 |
attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting |
3696 |
face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute |
3697 |
names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means |
3698 |
that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font |
3699 |
width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries |
3700 |
to find a best match for the specified font height, etc. |
3701 |
|
3702 |
Setting `face-font-family-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
3703 |
alternative font families to try if a family specified by a face |
3704 |
doesn't exist. |
3705 |
|
3706 |
Setting `face-font-registry-alternatives' allows the user to specify |
3707 |
all alternative font registry names to try for a face specifying a |
3708 |
registry. |
3709 |
|
3710 |
Please note that the interpretations of the above two variables are |
3711 |
slightly different. |
3712 |
|
3713 |
Setting face-ignored-fonts allows the user to ignore specific fonts. |
3714 |
|
3715 |
|
3716 |
**** Scalable fonts |
3717 |
|
3718 |
Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default, |
3719 |
since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86 |
3720 |
servers. |
3721 |
|
3722 |
To enable scalable font use, set the variable |
3723 |
`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use |
3724 |
scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used. |
3725 |
Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A |
3726 |
scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from |
3727 |
that list. Example: |
3728 |
|
3729 |
(setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$")) |
3730 |
|
3731 |
allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'. |
3732 |
|
3733 |
*** Functions and variables related to font selection. |
3734 |
|
3735 |
- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME |
3736 |
|
3737 |
Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY |
3738 |
is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a |
3739 |
string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'. |
3740 |
|
3741 |
If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of |
3742 |
the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P |
3743 |
FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name. |
3744 |
POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and |
3745 |
SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font. |
3746 |
These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil |
3747 |
if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and |
3748 |
REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of |
3749 |
the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting |
3750 |
of the face font sort order. |
3751 |
|
3752 |
- Function: x-font-family-list |
3753 |
|
3754 |
Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is |
3755 |
omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses |
3756 |
(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is |
3757 |
non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch. |
3758 |
|
3759 |
- Variable: font-list-limit |
3760 |
|
3761 |
Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions |
3762 |
won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a |
3763 |
matching font. The default is currently 100. |
3764 |
|
3765 |
*** Setting face attributes. |
3766 |
|
3767 |
For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible |
3768 |
with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now |
3769 |
implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and |
3770 |
`face-attribute'. |
3771 |
|
3772 |
Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword |
3773 |
symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'. |
3774 |
|
3775 |
The following attributes are recognized: |
3776 |
|
3777 |
`:family' |
3778 |
|
3779 |
VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'', |
3780 |
or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*' |
3781 |
and `?' are allowed. |
3782 |
|
3783 |
`:width' |
3784 |
|
3785 |
VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use. |
3786 |
It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed', |
3787 |
`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded', |
3788 |
`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'. |
3789 |
|
3790 |
`:height' |
3791 |
|
3792 |
VALUE must be either an integer specifying the height of the font to use |
3793 |
in 1/10 pt, a floating point number specifying the amount by which to |
3794 |
scale any underlying face, or a function, which is called with the old |
3795 |
height (from the underlying face), and should return the new height. |
3796 |
|
3797 |
`:weight' |
3798 |
|
3799 |
VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the |
3800 |
symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal', |
3801 |
`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'. |
3802 |
|
3803 |
`:slant' |
3804 |
|
3805 |
VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the |
3806 |
symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or |
3807 |
`reverse-oblique'. |
3808 |
|
3809 |
`:foreground', `:background' |
3810 |
|
3811 |
VALUE must be a color name, a string. |
3812 |
|
3813 |
`:underline' |
3814 |
|
3815 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If |
3816 |
VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is |
3817 |
a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly |
3818 |
don't underline. |
3819 |
|
3820 |
`:overline' |
3821 |
|
3822 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If |
3823 |
VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a |
3824 |
string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't |
3825 |
overline. |
3826 |
|
3827 |
`:strike-through' |
3828 |
|
3829 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line |
3830 |
striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the |
3831 |
face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE |
3832 |
is nil, explicitly don't strike through. |
3833 |
|
3834 |
`:box' |
3835 |
|
3836 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn |
3837 |
around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If |
3838 |
VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color |
3839 |
of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name, |
3840 |
and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise, |
3841 |
VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH |
3842 |
:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from |
3843 |
the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as |
3844 |
specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it |
3845 |
defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is |
3846 |
the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background |
3847 |
color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box |
3848 |
should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking |
3849 |
like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box |
3850 |
that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if |
3851 |
the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D |
3852 |
box. |
3853 |
|
3854 |
`:inverse-video' |
3855 |
|
3856 |
VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in |
3857 |
inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil. |
3858 |
|
3859 |
`:stipple' |
3860 |
|
3861 |
If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data. |
3862 |
The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are |
3863 |
searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH |
3864 |
HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA |
3865 |
is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means |
3866 |
explicitly don't use a stipple pattern. |
3867 |
|
3868 |
For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight', |
3869 |
and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name: |
3870 |
|
3871 |
`:font' |
3872 |
|
3873 |
Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid |
3874 |
XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font |
3875 |
is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous |
3876 |
versions of Emacs. |
3877 |
|
3878 |
For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can |
3879 |
be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE |
3880 |
must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed." |
3881 |
|
3882 |
Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and |
3883 |
`defface'. |
3884 |
|
3885 |
`:inherit' |
3886 |
|
3887 |
VALUE is the name of a face from which to inherit attributes, or a list |
3888 |
of face names. Attributes from inherited faces are merged into the face |
3889 |
like an underlying face would be, with higher priority than underlying faces. |
3890 |
|
3891 |
*** Face attributes and X resources |
3892 |
|
3893 |
The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes |
3894 |
from X resources: |
3895 |
|
3896 |
Face attribute X resource class |
3897 |
----------------------------------------------------------------------- |
3898 |
:family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily |
3899 |
:width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth |
3900 |
:height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight |
3901 |
:weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight |
3902 |
:slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant |
3903 |
foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground |
3904 |
:background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground |
3905 |
:overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline |
3906 |
:strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough |
3907 |
:box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox |
3908 |
:underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline |
3909 |
:inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse |
3910 |
:stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple |
3911 |
or attributeBackgroundPixmap |
3912 |
Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap |
3913 |
:font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
3914 |
:bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold |
3915 |
:italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic |
3916 |
:font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont |
3917 |
|
3918 |
*** Text property `face'. |
3919 |
|
3920 |
The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face |
3921 |
specification or a list of such specifications. Each face |
3922 |
specification can be |
3923 |
|
3924 |
1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face. |
3925 |
|
3926 |
2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each |
3927 |
KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value |
3928 |
for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute' |
3929 |
for face attribute names. |
3930 |
|
3931 |
3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or |
3932 |
(BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is |
3933 |
for compatibility with previous Emacs versions. |
3934 |
|
3935 |
** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals. |
3936 |
|
3937 |
The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use |
3938 |
on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on |
3939 |
the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by |
3940 |
default. You can get defined colors with a call to |
3941 |
`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be |
3942 |
used to clear the mapping table. |
3943 |
|
3944 |
** Unified support for colors independent of frame type. |
3945 |
|
3946 |
The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values', |
3947 |
and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose |
3948 |
type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style |
3949 |
color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame |
3950 |
display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the |
3951 |
old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and |
3952 |
`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for |
3953 |
compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs |
3954 |
should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to |
3955 |
modify their color-related behavior. |
3956 |
|
3957 |
The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for |
3958 |
any frame type. |
3959 |
|
3960 |
** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities. |
3961 |
|
3962 |
The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p', |
3963 |
`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens', |
3964 |
`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width', |
3965 |
`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under', |
3966 |
`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and |
3967 |
`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular |
3968 |
display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing |
3969 |
the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling |
3970 |
platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'. |
3971 |
|
3972 |
The new function `display-images-p' returns non-nil if a particular |
3973 |
display can display image files. |
3974 |
|
3975 |
** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer. |
3976 |
|
3977 |
This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to. |
3978 |
To disallow this completely (like previous versions of emacs), customize |
3979 |
the variable `minibuffer-prompt-properties', and turn on the |
3980 |
`Inviolable' option. |
3981 |
|
3982 |
The function minibuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the |
3983 |
end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current. |
3984 |
Otherwise, it returns zero. |
3985 |
|
3986 |
** New `field' abstraction in buffers. |
3987 |
|
3988 |
There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs |
3989 |
buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field' |
3990 |
property (which can be a text property or an overlay). |
3991 |
|
3992 |
Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence, |
3993 |
forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come |
3994 |
to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will |
3995 |
not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement |
3996 |
commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field |
3997 |
boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding |
3998 |
`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these |
3999 |
functions. |
4000 |
|
4001 |
Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in |
4002 |
a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common |
4003 |
editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt. |
4004 |
|
4005 |
The following functions are defined for operating on fields: |
4006 |
|
4007 |
- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY |
4008 |
|
4009 |
Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS. |
4010 |
|
4011 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
4012 |
If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the |
4013 |
constrained position if that is different. |
4014 |
|
4015 |
If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable |
4016 |
positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument |
4017 |
ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is |
4018 |
constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property |
4019 |
as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
4020 |
is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent |
4021 |
fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with |
4022 |
the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is |
4023 |
also considered to be `on the boundary'. |
4024 |
|
4025 |
If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining |
4026 |
NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned |
4027 |
unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like |
4028 |
C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries |
4029 |
only in the case where they can still move to the right line. |
4030 |
|
4031 |
If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has |
4032 |
a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored. |
4033 |
|
4034 |
Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil. |
4035 |
|
4036 |
- Function: delete-field &optional POS |
4037 |
|
4038 |
Delete the field surrounding POS. |
4039 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
4040 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
4041 |
|
4042 |
- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
4043 |
|
4044 |
Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS. |
4045 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
4046 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
4047 |
If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its |
4048 |
field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned. |
4049 |
|
4050 |
- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE |
4051 |
|
4052 |
Return the end of the field surrounding POS. |
4053 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
4054 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
4055 |
If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field, |
4056 |
then the end of the *following* field is returned. |
4057 |
|
4058 |
- Function: field-string &optional POS |
4059 |
|
4060 |
Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string. |
4061 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
4062 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
4063 |
|
4064 |
- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS |
4065 |
|
4066 |
Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties. |
4067 |
A field is a region of text with the same `field' property. |
4068 |
If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS. |
4069 |
|
4070 |
** Image support. |
4071 |
|
4072 |
Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving |
4073 |
strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of |
4074 |
(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value |
4075 |
replaces the display of the characters having that property. |
4076 |
|
4077 |
If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of |
4078 |
`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If |
4079 |
AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a |
4080 |
window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal |
4081 |
area. |
4082 |
|
4083 |
IMAGE is an image specification. |
4084 |
|
4085 |
*** Image specifications |
4086 |
|
4087 |
Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS |
4088 |
is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each |
4089 |
specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a |
4090 |
symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not |
4091 |
described below are ignored. |
4092 |
|
4093 |
The following is a list of properties all image types share. |
4094 |
|
4095 |
`:ascent ASCENT' |
4096 |
|
4097 |
ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'. |
4098 |
If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height |
4099 |
to use for its ascent. |
4100 |
|
4101 |
If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the |
4102 |
image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in. |
4103 |
|
4104 |
If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a |
4105 |
centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position |
4106 |
of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and |
4107 |
overlays that apply to the image. |
4108 |
|
4109 |
`:margin MARGIN' |
4110 |
|
4111 |
MARGIN must be either a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put |
4112 |
as margin around the image, or a pair (X . Y) with X specifying the |
4113 |
horizontal margin and Y specifying the vertical margin. Default is 0. |
4114 |
|
4115 |
`:relief RELIEF' |
4116 |
|
4117 |
RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief |
4118 |
around an image. |
4119 |
|
4120 |
`:conversion ALGO' |
4121 |
|
4122 |
Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. |
4123 |
|
4124 |
ALGO `laplace' or `emboss' means apply a Laplace or ``emboss'' |
4125 |
edge-detection algorithm to the image. |
4126 |
|
4127 |
ALGO `(edge-detection :matrix MATRIX :color-adjust ADJUST)' means |
4128 |
apply a general edge-detection algorithm. MATRIX must be either a |
4129 |
nine-element list or a nine-element vector of numbers. A pixel at |
4130 |
position x/y in the transformed image is computed from original pixels |
4131 |
around that position. MATRIX specifies, for each pixel in the |
4132 |
neighborhood of x/y, a factor with which that pixel will influence the |
4133 |
transformed pixel; element 0 specifies the factor for the pixel at |
4134 |
x-1/y-1, element 1 the factor for the pixel at x/y-1 etc. as shown |
4135 |
below. |
4136 |
|
4137 |
(x-1/y-1 x/y-1 x+1/y-1 |
4138 |
x-1/y x/y x+1/y |
4139 |
x-1/y+1 x/y+1 x+1/y+1) |
4140 |
|
4141 |
The resulting pixel is computed from the color intensity of the color |
4142 |
resulting from summing up the RGB values of surrounding pixels, |
4143 |
multiplied by the specified factors, and dividing that sum by the sum |
4144 |
of the factors' absolute values. |
4145 |
|
4146 |
Laplace edge-detection currently uses a matrix of |
4147 |
|
4148 |
(1 0 0 |
4149 |
0 0 0 |
4150 |
9 9 -1) |
4151 |
|
4152 |
Emboss edge-detection uses a matrix of |
4153 |
|
4154 |
( 2 -1 0 |
4155 |
-1 0 1 |
4156 |
0 1 -2) |
4157 |
|
4158 |
ALGO `disabled' means transform the image so that it looks |
4159 |
``disabled''. |
4160 |
|
4161 |
`:mask MASK' |
4162 |
|
4163 |
If MASK is `heuristic' or `(heuristic BG)', build a clipping mask for |
4164 |
the image, so that the background of a frame is visible behind the |
4165 |
image. If BG is not specified, or if BG is t, determine the |
4166 |
background color of the image by looking at the 4 corners of the |
4167 |
image, assuming the most frequently occurring color from the corners is |
4168 |
the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must be a list `(RED |
4169 |
GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the background of the |
4170 |
image. |
4171 |
|
4172 |
If MASK is nil, remove a mask from the image, if it has one. Images |
4173 |
in some formats include a mask which can be removed by specifying |
4174 |
`:mask nil'. |
4175 |
|
4176 |
`:file FILE' |
4177 |
|
4178 |
Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it, |
4179 |
search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support |
4180 |
building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property |
4181 |
may be present in the image specification. |
4182 |
|
4183 |
`:data DATA' |
4184 |
|
4185 |
Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet |
4186 |
supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be |
4187 |
present in an image specification, but not both. All image types |
4188 |
support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA. |
4189 |
|
4190 |
*** Supported image types |
4191 |
|
4192 |
**** XBM, image type `xbm'. |
4193 |
|
4194 |
XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image |
4195 |
properties supported are: |
4196 |
|
4197 |
`:foreground FG' |
4198 |
|
4199 |
FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
4200 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color. |
4201 |
|
4202 |
`:background BG' |
4203 |
|
4204 |
BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil |
4205 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
4206 |
|
4207 |
XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this |
4208 |
case, the image specification must contain the following properties |
4209 |
instead of a `:file' property. |
4210 |
|
4211 |
`:width WIDTH' |
4212 |
|
4213 |
WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels. |
4214 |
|
4215 |
`:height HEIGHT' |
4216 |
|
4217 |
HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels. |
4218 |
|
4219 |
`:data DATA' |
4220 |
|
4221 |
DATA must be either |
4222 |
|
4223 |
1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must |
4224 |
have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT |
4225 |
|
4226 |
2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT |
4227 |
|
4228 |
3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the |
4229 |
bitmap. |
4230 |
|
4231 |
4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor |
4232 |
height may be specified in this case because these are defined |
4233 |
in the file. |
4234 |
|
4235 |
**** XPM, image type `xpm' |
4236 |
|
4237 |
XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package |
4238 |
`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is |
4239 |
found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via |
4240 |
`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'. |
4241 |
|
4242 |
Additional image properties supported are: |
4243 |
|
4244 |
`:color-symbols SYMBOLS' |
4245 |
|
4246 |
SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the |
4247 |
name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color |
4248 |
name. |
4249 |
|
4250 |
XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case, |
4251 |
add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property. |
4252 |
|
4253 |
The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able |
4254 |
to display compressed images. |
4255 |
|
4256 |
**** PBM, image type `pbm' |
4257 |
|
4258 |
PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and |
4259 |
mono images are supported. Additional image properties supported for |
4260 |
mono images are: |
4261 |
|
4262 |
`:foreground FG' |
4263 |
|
4264 |
FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color, or nil |
4265 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's foreground color. |
4266 |
|
4267 |
`:background FG' |
4268 |
|
4269 |
BG must be a string specifying the image background color, or nil |
4270 |
meaning to use the default. Default is the frame's background color. |
4271 |
|
4272 |
**** JPEG, image type `jpeg' |
4273 |
|
4274 |
Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg', |
4275 |
package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
4276 |
properties defined. |
4277 |
|
4278 |
**** TIFF, image type `tiff' |
4279 |
|
4280 |
Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff', |
4281 |
package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
4282 |
properties defined. |
4283 |
|
4284 |
**** GIF, image type `gif' |
4285 |
|
4286 |
Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package |
4287 |
`libungif-4.1.0', or later. |
4288 |
|
4289 |
Additional image properties supported are: |
4290 |
|
4291 |
`:index INDEX' |
4292 |
|
4293 |
INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a |
4294 |
multi-image GIF file. An error is signaled if INDEX is too large. |
4295 |
|
4296 |
This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs. |
4297 |
For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file |
4298 |
at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images |
4299 |
every 0.1 seconds. |
4300 |
|
4301 |
(defun show-anim (file max) |
4302 |
"Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages." |
4303 |
(display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t)) |
4304 |
|
4305 |
(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time) |
4306 |
(when (= idx max) |
4307 |
(setq idx 0)) |
4308 |
(let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx))) |
4309 |
(save-excursion |
4310 |
(set-buffer buffer) |
4311 |
(goto-char (point-min)) |
4312 |
(unless first-time (delete-char 1)) |
4313 |
(insert-image img "x")) |
4314 |
(run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil))) |
4315 |
|
4316 |
**** PNG, image type `png' |
4317 |
|
4318 |
Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng', |
4319 |
package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image |
4320 |
properties defined. |
4321 |
|
4322 |
**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'. |
4323 |
|
4324 |
Additional image properties supported are: |
4325 |
|
4326 |
`:pt-width WIDTH' |
4327 |
|
4328 |
WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an |
4329 |
integer. This is a required property. |
4330 |
|
4331 |
`:pt-height HEIGHT' |
4332 |
|
4333 |
HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT |
4334 |
must be a integer. This is an required property. |
4335 |
|
4336 |
`:bounding-box BOX' |
4337 |
|
4338 |
BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of |
4339 |
the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS |
4340 |
files. This is an required property. |
4341 |
|
4342 |
Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See |
4343 |
lisp/gs.el. |
4344 |
|
4345 |
*** Lisp interface. |
4346 |
|
4347 |
The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types |
4348 |
which are supported in the current configuration. |
4349 |
|
4350 |
Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when |
4351 |
they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds. |
4352 |
The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache |
4353 |
manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all |
4354 |
images with `equal' specifications share the same image. |
4355 |
|
4356 |
*** Simplified image API, image.el |
4357 |
|
4358 |
The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image |
4359 |
creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image' |
4360 |
can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to |
4361 |
define an image based on available image types. The functions |
4362 |
`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a |
4363 |
buffer. |
4364 |
|
4365 |
** Display margins. |
4366 |
|
4367 |
Windows can now have margins which are used for special text |
4368 |
and images. |
4369 |
|
4370 |
To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables |
4371 |
`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call |
4372 |
`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to |
4373 |
obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and |
4374 |
`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying |
4375 |
the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update |
4376 |
of the display margins. |
4377 |
|
4378 |
You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property |
4379 |
containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is |
4380 |
one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a |
4381 |
string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later |
4382 |
in this file). |
4383 |
|
4384 |
** Help display |
4385 |
|
4386 |
Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse |
4387 |
moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property |
4388 |
`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line |
4389 |
that have a `help-echo' property. |
4390 |
|
4391 |
If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function |
4392 |
is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is |
4393 |
the window in which the help was found. |
4394 |
|
4395 |
If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the |
4396 |
`help-echo' text property was found. |
4397 |
|
4398 |
If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and |
4399 |
POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse. |
4400 |
|
4401 |
If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with |
4402 |
the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the |
4403 |
mouse. |
4404 |
|
4405 |
If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a |
4406 |
string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string. |
4407 |
|
4408 |
For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to |
4409 |
determine the help to display. If their definition contains a |
4410 |
property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string. |
4411 |
For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is |
4412 |
used as help string. |
4413 |
|
4414 |
The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays |
4415 |
the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window |
4416 |
causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area. |
4417 |
|
4418 |
** Vertical fractional scrolling. |
4419 |
|
4420 |
The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels. |
4421 |
This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible. |
4422 |
|
4423 |
The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical |
4424 |
scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height. |
4425 |
The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical |
4426 |
scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be |
4427 |
used. |
4428 |
|
4429 |
(global-set-key [A-down] |
4430 |
#'(lambda () |
4431 |
(interactive) |
4432 |
(set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
4433 |
(+ 0.5 (window-vscroll))))) |
4434 |
(global-set-key [A-up] |
4435 |
#'(lambda () |
4436 |
(interactive) |
4437 |
(set-window-vscroll (selected-window) |
4438 |
(- (window-vscroll) 0.5))))) |
4439 |
|
4440 |
** New hook `fontification-functions'. |
4441 |
|
4442 |
Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay |
4443 |
when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This |
4444 |
variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function |
4445 |
is called with one argument, POS. |
4446 |
|
4447 |
At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more |
4448 |
characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them |
4449 |
as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text |
4450 |
property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the |
4451 |
`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to. |
4452 |
|
4453 |
** Tool bar support. |
4454 |
|
4455 |
Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame |
4456 |
parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar") |
4457 |
controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value |
4458 |
suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and |
4459 |
`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed |
4460 |
automatically so that all tool bar items are visible. |
4461 |
|
4462 |
*** Tool bar item definitions |
4463 |
|
4464 |
Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key |
4465 |
`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)' |
4466 |
where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'. |
4467 |
|
4468 |
CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is |
4469 |
evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in |
4470 |
the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help' |
4471 |
property (see below). |
4472 |
|
4473 |
BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as |
4474 |
binding are currently ignored. |
4475 |
|
4476 |
The following properties are recognized: |
4477 |
|
4478 |
`:enable FORM'. |
4479 |
|
4480 |
FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled |
4481 |
or disabled. |
4482 |
|
4483 |
`:visible FORM' |
4484 |
|
4485 |
FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed. |
4486 |
|
4487 |
`:filter FUNCTION' |
4488 |
|
4489 |
FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which |
4490 |
FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is |
4491 |
used instead of BINDING to display this item. |
4492 |
|
4493 |
`:button (TYPE SELECTED)' |
4494 |
|
4495 |
TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated |
4496 |
and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not. |
4497 |
|
4498 |
`:image IMAGES' |
4499 |
|
4500 |
IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four |
4501 |
image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the |
4502 |
meaning of each of the four elements: |
4503 |
|
4504 |
Index Use when item is |
4505 |
---------------------------------------- |
4506 |
0 enabled and selected |
4507 |
1 enabled and deselected |
4508 |
2 disabled and selected |
4509 |
3 disabled and deselected |
4510 |
|
4511 |
If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection |
4512 |
algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state. |
4513 |
|
4514 |
`:help HELP-STRING'. |
4515 |
|
4516 |
Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help |
4517 |
is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item. |
4518 |
|
4519 |
The function `toolbar-add-item' is a convenience function for adding |
4520 |
toolbar items generally, and `tool-bar-add-item-from-menu' can be used |
4521 |
to define a toolbar item with a binding copied from an item on the |
4522 |
menu bar. |
4523 |
|
4524 |
The default bindings use a menu-item :filter to derive the tool-bar |
4525 |
dynamically from variable `tool-bar-map' which may be set |
4526 |
buffer-locally to override the global map. |
4527 |
|
4528 |
*** Tool-bar-related variables. |
4529 |
|
4530 |
If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically |
4531 |
resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger |
4532 |
than 1/4 of the frame's size. |
4533 |
|
4534 |
If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be |
4535 |
raised when the mouse moves over them. |
4536 |
|
4537 |
You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting |
4538 |
`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of |
4539 |
pixels, or a pair of integers (X . Y) specifying horizontal and |
4540 |
vertical margins . Default is 1. |
4541 |
|
4542 |
You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting |
4543 |
`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3. |
4544 |
|
4545 |
*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers. |
4546 |
|
4547 |
You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on |
4548 |
a tool bar item. If |
4549 |
|
4550 |
(define-key global-map [tool-bar shell] |
4551 |
'(menu-item "Shell" shell |
4552 |
:image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm"))) |
4553 |
|
4554 |
is the original tool bar item definition, then |
4555 |
|
4556 |
(define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command) |
4557 |
|
4558 |
makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same |
4559 |
item. |
4560 |
|
4561 |
** Mode line changes. |
4562 |
|
4563 |
*** Mouse-sensitive mode line. |
4564 |
|
4565 |
The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there |
4566 |
that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display |
4567 |
a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line. |
4568 |
|
4569 |
1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has |
4570 |
a `local-map' text property. |
4571 |
|
4572 |
2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and |
4573 |
that format specifier has a `local-map' property. |
4574 |
|
4575 |
3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM |
4576 |
is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a |
4577 |
`local-map' property. |
4578 |
|
4579 |
The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo' |
4580 |
properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an |
4581 |
example. |
4582 |
|
4583 |
*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is |
4584 |
evaluated and the result is used as mode line element. |
4585 |
|
4586 |
*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local |
4587 |
variable mode-line-format to nil. |
4588 |
|
4589 |
*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window. |
4590 |
|
4591 |
This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable |
4592 |
`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are |
4593 |
completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and |
4594 |
`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top |
4595 |
line. |
4596 |
|
4597 |
The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face |
4598 |
`header-line'. |
4599 |
|
4600 |
The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a |
4601 |
position in the header-line. |
4602 |
|
4603 |
** Text property `display' |
4604 |
|
4605 |
The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, |
4606 |
replace text with other text, display text in marginal area, and it is |
4607 |
also used to control other aspects of how text displays. The value of |
4608 |
the `display' property should be a display specification, as described |
4609 |
below, or a list or vector containing display specifications. |
4610 |
|
4611 |
*** Replacing text, displaying text in marginal areas |
4612 |
|
4613 |
To replace the text having the `display' property with some other |
4614 |
text, use a display specification of the form `(LOCATION STRING)'. |
4615 |
|
4616 |
If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', STRING is displayed in the left |
4617 |
marginal area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in |
4618 |
the right marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' STRING |
4619 |
is displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
4620 |
simpler form STRING as property value. |
4621 |
|
4622 |
*** Variable width and height spaces |
4623 |
|
4624 |
To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display |
4625 |
specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is |
4626 |
`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal |
4627 |
area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right |
4628 |
marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is |
4629 |
displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the |
4630 |
simpler form STRETCH as property value. |
4631 |
|
4632 |
The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space |
4633 |
PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the |
4634 |
properties described below. |
4635 |
|
4636 |
The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the |
4637 |
characters having the `display' property. |
4638 |
|
4639 |
- :width WIDTH |
4640 |
|
4641 |
Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal |
4642 |
character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number. |
4643 |
|
4644 |
- :relative-width FACTOR |
4645 |
|
4646 |
Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the |
4647 |
first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the |
4648 |
same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the |
4649 |
width of that character by FACTOR. |
4650 |
|
4651 |
- :align-to HPOS |
4652 |
|
4653 |
Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The |
4654 |
value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width. |
4655 |
|
4656 |
Exactly one of the above properties should be used. |
4657 |
|
4658 |
- :height HEIGHT |
4659 |
|
4660 |
Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the |
4661 |
normal line height. |
4662 |
|
4663 |
- :relative-height FACTOR |
4664 |
|
4665 |
The height of the space is computed as the product of the height |
4666 |
of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR. |
4667 |
|
4668 |
- :ascent ASCENT |
4669 |
|
4670 |
Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be |
4671 |
used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the |
4672 |
baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or |
4673 |
equal to 100. |
4674 |
|
4675 |
You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together. |
4676 |
|
4677 |
*** Images |
4678 |
|
4679 |
A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION |
4680 |
. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces, |
4681 |
in the display, the characters having this display specification in |
4682 |
their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)', |
4683 |
the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is |
4684 |
`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal |
4685 |
area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in |
4686 |
the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE |
4687 |
as display specification. |
4688 |
|
4689 |
*** Other display properties |
4690 |
|
4691 |
- (space-width FACTOR) |
4692 |
|
4693 |
Specifies that space characters in the text having that property |
4694 |
should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an |
4695 |
integer or float. |
4696 |
|
4697 |
- (height HEIGHT) |
4698 |
|
4699 |
Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger. |
4700 |
|
4701 |
If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that |
4702 |
means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of |
4703 |
the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A |
4704 |
``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which |
4705 |
a font is available counts as a step. |
4706 |
|
4707 |
If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times |
4708 |
as tall as the frame's default font. |
4709 |
|
4710 |
If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current |
4711 |
height as argument. The function should return the new height to use. |
4712 |
|
4713 |
Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol |
4714 |
`height' bound to the current specified font height. |
4715 |
|
4716 |
- (raise FACTOR) |
4717 |
|
4718 |
FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current |
4719 |
font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters |
4720 |
raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The |
4721 |
amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the |
4722 |
`height' subproperty. |
4723 |
|
4724 |
*** Conditional display properties |
4725 |
|
4726 |
All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification |
4727 |
has the form `(when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC applies |
4728 |
only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated. During the |
4729 |
evaluation, `object' is bound to the string or buffer having the |
4730 |
conditional display property; `position' and `buffer-position' are |
4731 |
bound to the position within `object' and the buffer position where |
4732 |
the display property was found, respectively. Both positions can be |
4733 |
different when object is a string. |
4734 |
|
4735 |
The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to |
4736 |
`(when t . SPEC)'. |
4737 |
|
4738 |
** New menu separator types. |
4739 |
|
4740 |
Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with |
4741 |
item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are |
4742 |
treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used |
4743 |
to specify other menu separator types. |
4744 |
|
4745 |
- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine' |
4746 |
|
4747 |
No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the |
4748 |
separator occurs. |
4749 |
|
4750 |
- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine' |
4751 |
|
4752 |
A single line in the menu's foreground color. |
4753 |
|
4754 |
- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine' |
4755 |
|
4756 |
A double line in the menu's foreground color. |
4757 |
|
4758 |
- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine' |
4759 |
|
4760 |
A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
4761 |
|
4762 |
- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine' |
4763 |
|
4764 |
A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color. |
4765 |
|
4766 |
- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn' |
4767 |
|
4768 |
A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the form |
4769 |
displayed for item names consisting of dashes only. |
4770 |
|
4771 |
- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut' |
4772 |
|
4773 |
A single line with 3D raised appearance. |
4774 |
|
4775 |
- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash' |
4776 |
|
4777 |
A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance. |
4778 |
|
4779 |
- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash' |
4780 |
|
4781 |
A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance. |
4782 |
|
4783 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn' |
4784 |
|
4785 |
Two lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
4786 |
|
4787 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut' |
4788 |
|
4789 |
Two lines with 3D raised appearance. |
4790 |
|
4791 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash' |
4792 |
|
4793 |
Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance. |
4794 |
|
4795 |
- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash' |
4796 |
|
4797 |
Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance. |
4798 |
|
4799 |
Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like |
4800 |
the corresponding single-line separators. |
4801 |
|
4802 |
** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors. |
4803 |
|
4804 |
The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and |
4805 |
`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors. |
4806 |
Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify |
4807 |
that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars, |
4808 |
default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the |
4809 |
default background is the background color of the frame, and the |
4810 |
default foreground is black. |
4811 |
|
4812 |
The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground' |
4813 |
(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class |
4814 |
`ScrollBarBackground'). |
4815 |
|
4816 |
Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource |
4817 |
settings for scroll bar colors. |
4818 |
|
4819 |
** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent |
4820 |
display updates from being interrupted when input is pending. |
4821 |
|
4822 |
** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it |
4823 |
starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based |
4824 |
on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued |
4825 |
line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from |
4826 |
the original window start. |
4827 |
|
4828 |
** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions |
4829 |
`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed |
4830 |
now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented. |
4831 |
|
4832 |
** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height. |
4833 |
|
4834 |
A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable |
4835 |
`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes |
4836 |
windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any |
4837 |
other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height. |
4838 |
|
4839 |
The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer |
4840 |
fixed-width and fixed-height. |
4841 |
|
4842 |
(set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t) |
4843 |
|
4844 |
A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is |
4845 |
fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the |
4846 |
window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To |
4847 |
change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed' |
4848 |
temporarily to nil, for example |
4849 |
|
4850 |
(let ((window-size-fixed nil)) |
4851 |
(enlarge-window 10)) |
4852 |
|
4853 |
Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically, |
4854 |
or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error. |
4855 |
|
4856 |
** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS |
4857 |
terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape |
4858 |
to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter |
4859 |
overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is |
4860 |
horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't |
4861 |
support a vertical-bar cursor). |
4862 |
|
4863 |
|
4864 |
|
4865 |
* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes |
4866 |
|
4867 |
** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard |
4868 |
input. |
4869 |
|
4870 |
** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos. |
4871 |
|
4872 |
** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages. |
4873 |
|
4874 |
** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not |
4875 |
only for character input, but also in incremental search. The |
4876 |
exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets |
4877 |
(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence |
4878 |
(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search. |
4879 |
|
4880 |
** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has |
4881 |
been added. |
4882 |
|
4883 |
|
4884 |
* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change |
4885 |
|
4886 |
** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added. |
4887 |
|
4888 |
|
4889 |
|
4890 |
* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes. |
4891 |
|
4892 |
** Not new, but not mentioned before: |
4893 |
M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark. |
4894 |
|
4895 |
* Changes in Emacs 20.4 |
4896 |
|
4897 |
** Init file may be called .emacs.el. |
4898 |
|
4899 |
You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'. |
4900 |
Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name |
4901 |
`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way. |
4902 |
|
4903 |
If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file |
4904 |
is the one that is used. |
4905 |
|
4906 |
** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return |
4907 |
the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous). |
4908 |
Also, you can specify a place to put the error output, |
4909 |
separate from the command's regular output. |
4910 |
Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer |
4911 |
says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name. |
4912 |
In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies |
4913 |
the buffer name. |
4914 |
|
4915 |
When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error |
4916 |
output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate |
4917 |
it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not |
4918 |
cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there. |
4919 |
|
4920 |
** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in |
4921 |
the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom, |
4922 |
is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers |
4923 |
created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs. |
4924 |
|
4925 |
** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For |
4926 |
example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names |
4927 |
match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the |
4928 |
quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name. |
4929 |
|
4930 |
** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches |
4931 |
now have the same feature as occur and query-replace: |
4932 |
if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then |
4933 |
they never ignore case. |
4934 |
|
4935 |
** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned |
4936 |
under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually |
4937 |
applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents |
4938 |
of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or |
4939 |
just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs |
4940 |
convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a |
4941 |
part of the general feature of coding system conversion. |
4942 |
|
4943 |
If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to |
4944 |
the same format that was used in the file before. |
4945 |
|
4946 |
You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable |
4947 |
`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group. |
4948 |
|
4949 |
** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been |
4950 |
renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling. |
4951 |
This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected. |
4952 |
|
4953 |
** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed. |
4954 |
The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a |
4955 |
buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for |
4956 |
your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format |
4957 |
is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual |
4958 |
end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for |
4959 |
Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac). |
4960 |
|
4961 |
The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos, |
4962 |
eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings, |
4963 |
control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line |
4964 |
format. You can now customize these variables. |
4965 |
|
4966 |
** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a |
4967 |
filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a |
4968 |
filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of |
4969 |
enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil. |
4970 |
|
4971 |
** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode |
4972 |
in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given |
4973 |
windows just big enough to hold the whole contents. |
4974 |
|
4975 |
** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function |
4976 |
dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file |
4977 |
doesn't have any effect. |
4978 |
|
4979 |
** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process, |
4980 |
not one per buffer. |
4981 |
|
4982 |
** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to |
4983 |
use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line: |
4984 |
(add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup) |
4985 |
|
4986 |
** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el. |
4987 |
To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the |
4988 |
`auto-show-mode' command. |
4989 |
|
4990 |
** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to |
4991 |
avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous |
4992 |
versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font |
4993 |
choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change |
4994 |
occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then. |
4995 |
|
4996 |
** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's |
4997 |
cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel. |
4998 |
|
4999 |
** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the |
5000 |
character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this |
5001 |
feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil. |
5002 |
|
5003 |
** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at |
5004 |
the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an |
5005 |
interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode |
5006 |
and variable specification, as well as on the first line. |
5007 |
|
5008 |
** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters. |
5009 |
|
5010 |
The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system |
5011 |
that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and |
5012 |
one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that |
5013 |
codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character |
5014 |
set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc. |
5015 |
|
5016 |
Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates |
5017 |
from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported. |
5018 |
|
5019 |
IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have |
5020 |
equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to |
5021 |
a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to |
5022 |
`?' on other systems. |
5023 |
|
5024 |
IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this |
5025 |
feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on |
5026 |
Unix. |
5027 |
|
5028 |
Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the |
5029 |
current codepage when it starts. |
5030 |
|
5031 |
** Mail changes |
5032 |
|
5033 |
*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if |
5034 |
`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime', |
5035 |
appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if |
5036 |
non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other |
5037 |
MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three |
5038 |
headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is |
5039 |
latin-1: |
5040 |
|
5041 |
MIME-version: 1.0 |
5042 |
Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1 |
5043 |
Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit |
5044 |
|
5045 |
*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the |
5046 |
default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than |
5047 |
default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than |
5048 |
sendmail-coding-system and the local value of |
5049 |
buffer-file-coding-system. |
5050 |
|
5051 |
You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set |
5052 |
sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing |
5053 |
mail. |
5054 |
|
5055 |
*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters, |
5056 |
if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them, |
5057 |
Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a |
5058 |
list of possible coding systems. |
5059 |
|
5060 |
** CC Mode changes |
5061 |
|
5062 |
*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major |
5063 |
modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no |
5064 |
longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's |
5065 |
docstring for details. |
5066 |
|
5067 |
*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic |
5068 |
symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is |
5069 |
found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a |
5070 |
prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied |
5071 |
lineup functions use this feature currently. |
5072 |
|
5073 |
*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and |
5074 |
"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java. |
5075 |
|
5076 |
*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for |
5077 |
"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines. |
5078 |
|
5079 |
*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately |
5080 |
from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new |
5081 |
symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on |
5082 |
c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for |
5083 |
anonymous classes. |
5084 |
|
5085 |
*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific |
5086 |
syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont |
5087 |
|
5088 |
*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol |
5089 |
inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike |
5090 |
support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup |
5091 |
function c-lineup-inexpr-block. |
5092 |
|
5093 |
*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists |
5094 |
(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open |
5095 |
brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's. |
5096 |
c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces |
5097 |
(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified). |
5098 |
|
5099 |
*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default. |
5100 |
|
5101 |
*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line. |
5102 |
|
5103 |
*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren) |
5104 |
for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed. |
5105 |
|
5106 |
*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero. |
5107 |
|
5108 |
*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation |
5109 |
associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace. |
5110 |
This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some |
5111 |
circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the |
5112 |
class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that). |
5113 |
|
5114 |
** Gnus changes. |
5115 |
|
5116 |
*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been |
5117 |
added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the |
5118 |
Gnus manual for the full story. |
5119 |
|
5120 |
*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than |
5121 |
before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft |
5122 |
group, which is created automatically. |
5123 |
|
5124 |
*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header |
5125 |
values. |
5126 |
|
5127 |
*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's. |
5128 |
|
5129 |
*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message |
5130 |
outside the region: `C-c C-v'. |
5131 |
|
5132 |
*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with |
5133 |
`C-u C-c C-c'. |
5134 |
|
5135 |
*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization. |
5136 |
|
5137 |
*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit |
5138 |
re-highlighting of the article buffer. |
5139 |
|
5140 |
*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'. |
5141 |
|
5142 |
*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic |
5143 |
Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details. |
5144 |
|
5145 |
*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix |
5146 |
`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file. |
5147 |
|
5148 |
*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater |
5149 |
control over simplification. |
5150 |
|
5151 |
*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread. |
5152 |
|
5153 |
*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the |
5154 |
limit. |
5155 |
|
5156 |
*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text. |
5157 |
|
5158 |
*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'. |
5159 |
|
5160 |
*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed. |
5161 |
If you used this function in your initialization files, you must |
5162 |
rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead. |
5163 |
|
5164 |
*** Canceling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix |
5165 |
`a' forces normal posting method. |
5166 |
|
5167 |
*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text |
5168 |
-- `W d'. |
5169 |
|
5170 |
*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands' |
5171 |
to a non-nil value. |
5172 |
|
5173 |
*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling |
5174 |
where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers. |
5175 |
|
5176 |
*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer |
5177 |
has been added. |
5178 |
|
5179 |
*** A history of where mails have been split is available. |
5180 |
|
5181 |
*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'. |
5182 |
|
5183 |
*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting |
5184 |
`gnus-score-thread-simplify'. |
5185 |
|
5186 |
*** A new function for citing in Message has been added -- |
5187 |
`message-cite-original-without-signature'. |
5188 |
|
5189 |
*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command. |
5190 |
|
5191 |
*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has |
5192 |
been added. |
5193 |
|
5194 |
*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the |
5195 |
`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable. |
5196 |
|
5197 |
*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually |
5198 |
updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command. |
5199 |
|
5200 |
*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend. |
5201 |
|
5202 |
*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb. |
5203 |
|
5204 |
*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated. |
5205 |
|
5206 |
** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode |
5207 |
|
5208 |
*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give |
5209 |
options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in |
5210 |
nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "". |
5211 |
|
5212 |
*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a |
5213 |
TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some |
5214 |
of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run |
5215 |
TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you |
5216 |
can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET. |
5217 |
|
5218 |
*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'. |
5219 |
All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available |
5220 |
but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use |
5221 |
the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell. |
5222 |
|
5223 |
*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check |
5224 |
the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur* |
5225 |
buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular |
5226 |
mismatch. |
5227 |
|
5228 |
** Changes to RefTeX mode |
5229 |
|
5230 |
*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and |
5231 |
file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys. |
5232 |
|
5233 |
*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now |
5234 |
lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1 |
5235 |
characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be |
5236 |
removed from the label. |
5237 |
|
5238 |
*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use |
5239 |
a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'. |
5240 |
|
5241 |
*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the |
5242 |
customization group `reftex-finding-files'. |
5243 |
|
5244 |
*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to |
5245 |
`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular |
5246 |
expressions. |
5247 |
|
5248 |
*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers. |
5249 |
|
5250 |
** New/deleted modes and packages |
5251 |
|
5252 |
*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and |
5253 |
SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'. |
5254 |
|
5255 |
*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for |
5256 |
editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with |
5257 |
SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'. |
5258 |
|
5259 |
*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer |
5260 |
changes with a special face. |
5261 |
|
5262 |
*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and |
5263 |
this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use |
5264 |
Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el. |
5265 |
|
5266 |
* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4 |
5267 |
|
5268 |
** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better. |
5269 |
This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets, |
5270 |
conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters, |
5271 |
and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details, |
5272 |
check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual. |
5273 |
|
5274 |
The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds |
5275 |
Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim |
5276 |
distribution when the config.bat script is run. |
5277 |
|
5278 |
** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on |
5279 |
MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it |
5280 |
controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written |
5281 |
directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of |
5282 |
Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing |
5283 |
on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a |
5284 |
string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external |
5285 |
program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of |
5286 |
printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.) |
5287 |
|
5288 |
** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript |
5289 |
output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs |
5290 |
available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard |
5291 |
input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a |
5292 |
temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external |
5293 |
program. |
5294 |
|
5295 |
An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT, |
5296 |
and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these |
5297 |
programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax |
5298 |
automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name |
5299 |
as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is |
5300 |
ignored, as both programs have no useful switches. |
5301 |
|
5302 |
** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has |
5303 |
a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on |
5304 |
MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but |
5305 |
was not documented clearly before. |
5306 |
|
5307 |
** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals. |
5308 |
This includes Tetris and Snake. |
5309 |
|
5310 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4 |
5311 |
|
5312 |
** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position |
5313 |
return the position of the beginning or end of the current line. |
5314 |
They both accept an optional argument, which has the same |
5315 |
meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line. |
5316 |
|
5317 |
** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument |
5318 |
WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing, |
5319 |
and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern. |
5320 |
|
5321 |
** Changes in the file-attributes function. |
5322 |
|
5323 |
*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float. |
5324 |
It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise. |
5325 |
|
5326 |
*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
5327 |
the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two |
5328 |
integers. |
5329 |
|
5330 |
** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of |
5331 |
files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same |
5332 |
arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that |
5333 |
file names and attributes are returned. |
5334 |
|
5335 |
** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for |
5336 |
sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It |
5337 |
accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its attributes. |
5338 |
It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and |
5339 |
returns the result. |
5340 |
|
5341 |
** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern |
5342 |
to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern. |
5343 |
|
5344 |
** New functions for base64 conversion: |
5345 |
|
5346 |
The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer |
5347 |
into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region |
5348 |
performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported |
5349 |
optionally. |
5350 |
|
5351 |
Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar |
5352 |
job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string. |
5353 |
|
5354 |
** |
5355 |
The new function process-running-child-p |
5356 |
will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its |
5357 |
terminal to its own child process. |
5358 |
|
5359 |
** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature: |
5360 |
when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal |
5361 |
to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell |
5362 |
itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent. |
5363 |
|
5364 |
** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can |
5365 |
be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists. |
5366 |
|
5367 |
** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'. |
5368 |
:included is an alias for :visible. |
5369 |
|
5370 |
easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by |
5371 |
easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used |
5372 |
to move or copy menu entries. |
5373 |
|
5374 |
** Multibyte editing changes |
5375 |
|
5376 |
*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is |
5377 |
an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to |
5378 |
make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also |
5379 |
work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and |
5380 |
char-bytes in a loop typically as below: |
5381 |
(setq char (sref str idx) |
5382 |
idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx))) |
5383 |
The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete. |
5384 |
|
5385 |
If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character |
5386 |
(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code: |
5387 |
(charset-bytes (char-charset ch)) |
5388 |
|
5389 |
*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the |
5390 |
region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or |
5391 |
deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error: |
5392 |
|
5393 |
Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibited |
5394 |
|
5395 |
This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character |
5396 |
across the boundary. |
5397 |
|
5398 |
*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include |
5399 |
`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases: |
5400 |
o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and |
5401 |
contains 8-bit characters. |
5402 |
o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and |
5403 |
contains invalid characters. |
5404 |
|
5405 |
*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove |
5406 |
text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly |
5407 |
preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing |
5408 |
text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct |
5409 |
way. |
5410 |
|
5411 |
*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems. |
5412 |
If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of |
5413 |
end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by |
5414 |
prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line. |
5415 |
|
5416 |
*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly |
5417 |
compose Thai characters in a string. |
5418 |
|
5419 |
** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third |
5420 |
argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name |
5421 |
for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as |
5422 |
menus should always use the third argument. |
5423 |
|
5424 |
** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char, |
5425 |
read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second |
5426 |
arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current |
5427 |
input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil. |
5428 |
|
5429 |
** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents |
5430 |
of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in |
5431 |
programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing |
5432 |
inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases. |
5433 |
|
5434 |
** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in |
5435 |
the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it |
5436 |
returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous |
5437 |
echo area contents. |
5438 |
|
5439 |
(with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY) |
5440 |
|
5441 |
** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument |
5442 |
NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the |
5443 |
requested feature cannot be loaded. |
5444 |
|
5445 |
** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the |
5446 |
foreground color, background color or stipple pattern |
5447 |
means to clear out that attribute. |
5448 |
|
5449 |
** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame |
5450 |
gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame. |
5451 |
|
5452 |
** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now |
5453 |
read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode |
5454 |
unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the |
5455 |
end of with-output-to-temp-buffer. |
5456 |
|
5457 |
** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on |
5458 |
the gap of the current buffer. |
5459 |
|
5460 |
** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way |
5461 |
to convert between character positions and byte positions in the |
5462 |
current buffer. |
5463 |
|
5464 |
** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to |
5465 |
facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs. |
5466 |
These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check |
5467 |
it back in after any modifications have been made. |
5468 |
|
5469 |
* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5470 |
|
5471 |
** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of |
5472 |
the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and |
5473 |
/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those |
5474 |
directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and |
5475 |
subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path. |
5476 |
|
5477 |
Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose |
5478 |
names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded. |
5479 |
Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory |
5480 |
which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use |
5481 |
these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched. |
5482 |
|
5483 |
Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it |
5484 |
starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each |
5485 |
time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower. |
5486 |
|
5487 |
This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs |
5488 |
Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically |
5489 |
to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the |
5490 |
subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a |
5491 |
`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired |
5492 |
results. |
5493 |
|
5494 |
** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from |
5495 |
GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers |
5496 |
that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in |
5497 |
fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago. |
5498 |
|
5499 |
* Changes in Emacs 20.3 |
5500 |
|
5501 |
** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command |
5502 |
including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward, |
5503 |
it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can |
5504 |
perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition. |
5505 |
|
5506 |
** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a |
5507 |
specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired |
5508 |
region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing |
5509 |
further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo |
5510 |
command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made |
5511 |
within the region you originally specified, until either all of them |
5512 |
are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that |
5513 |
region. |
5514 |
|
5515 |
In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests |
5516 |
selective undo. |
5517 |
|
5518 |
** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are |
5519 |
unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte |
5520 |
buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same |
5521 |
effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs |
5522 |
Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode. |
5523 |
|
5524 |
The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files, |
5525 |
though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use |
5526 |
-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to |
5527 |
load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started. |
5528 |
|
5529 |
** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and |
5530 |
no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the |
5531 |
enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is |
5532 |
something that most users not do. |
5533 |
|
5534 |
** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste |
5535 |
operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X. |
5536 |
The coding system can make a difference for communication with other |
5537 |
applications. |
5538 |
|
5539 |
C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and |
5540 |
pasting operations. |
5541 |
|
5542 |
** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by |
5543 |
setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks |
5544 |
like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different |
5545 |
printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting |
5546 |
`ps-printer-name'. |
5547 |
|
5548 |
** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a |
5549 |
minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember |
5550 |
any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it |
5551 |
except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting |
5552 |
incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor |
5553 |
hits a new word. |
5554 |
|
5555 |
Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for |
5556 |
Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not |
5557 |
to be confused by TeX commands. |
5558 |
|
5559 |
You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something |
5560 |
correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by |
5561 |
clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu |
5562 |
of various alternative replacements and actions. |
5563 |
|
5564 |
Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces |
5565 |
the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several |
5566 |
corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in |
5567 |
alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if |
5568 |
flyspell-sort-corrections is nil. |
5569 |
|
5570 |
Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if |
5571 |
flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil. |
5572 |
|
5573 |
** Changes in input method usage. |
5574 |
|
5575 |
Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among |
5576 |
the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p |
5577 |
respectively. |
5578 |
|
5579 |
You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion. |
5580 |
|
5581 |
If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one |
5582 |
of the alternatives with Mouse-2. |
5583 |
|
5584 |
The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so |
5585 |
that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'. |
5586 |
|
5587 |
If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given. |
5588 |
|
5589 |
If the value is t, extra guidance is always given. |
5590 |
|
5591 |
If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only |
5592 |
when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py. |
5593 |
|
5594 |
If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is |
5595 |
given in the following case: |
5596 |
o When you are using a complex input method. |
5597 |
o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer. |
5598 |
|
5599 |
If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting |
5600 |
input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice, |
5601 |
and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with, |
5602 |
setting it to t is helpful. |
5603 |
|
5604 |
The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method. |
5605 |
|
5606 |
In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following |
5607 |
keys: |
5608 |
Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method |
5609 |
C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc |
5610 |
F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja |
5611 |
These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language |
5612 |
environment. |
5613 |
|
5614 |
** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file |
5615 |
names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the |
5616 |
minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to |
5617 |
get |
5618 |
|
5619 |
/usr/foo//etc/passwd |
5620 |
|
5621 |
which stands for the file /etc/passwd. |
5622 |
|
5623 |
Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list. |
5624 |
Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list. |
5625 |
|
5626 |
** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t |
5627 |
at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve |
5628 |
its owner and group. |
5629 |
|
5630 |
** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs |
5631 |
Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries. |
5632 |
|
5633 |
** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle |
5634 |
contents before inserting the specified string on each line. |
5635 |
|
5636 |
** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle |
5637 |
which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column |
5638 |
in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified |
5639 |
by the left edge of the rectangle. |
5640 |
|
5641 |
** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG, |
5642 |
increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit |
5643 |
C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful |
5644 |
for writing keyboard macros. |
5645 |
|
5646 |
** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories, |
5647 |
files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The |
5648 |
frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as |
5649 |
the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define |
5650 |
additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and |
5651 |
info. |
5652 |
|
5653 |
** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%. |
5654 |
|
5655 |
** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x |
5656 |
query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region |
5657 |
contents only. |
5658 |
|
5659 |
** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for |
5660 |
confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call |
5661 |
the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM |
5662 |
says whether to ask for confirmation in this case. |
5663 |
|
5664 |
** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited |
5665 |
non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file |
5666 |
literally. If you say no, it signals an error. |
5667 |
|
5668 |
** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature |
5669 |
now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook. |
5670 |
Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is |
5671 |
inconsistent with Emacs conventions. |
5672 |
|
5673 |
** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or |
5674 |
failure if the command produces no output. |
5675 |
|
5676 |
** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window |
5677 |
manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move |
5678 |
the mouse. |
5679 |
|
5680 |
** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to |
5681 |
mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related |
5682 |
function and variable names. |
5683 |
|
5684 |
** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for |
5685 |
reading specific files. This has higher priority than |
5686 |
file-coding-system-alist. |
5687 |
|
5688 |
** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to |
5689 |
t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by |
5690 |
converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to |
5691 |
the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed |
5692 |
according to the current fontset. |
5693 |
|
5694 |
** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed. |
5695 |
|
5696 |
The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of |
5697 |
that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and |
5698 |
nonascii-insert-offset. |
5699 |
|
5700 |
For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if |
5701 |
enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table |
5702 |
nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte |
5703 |
characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters. |
5704 |
|
5705 |
** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get |
5706 |
an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning. |
5707 |
|
5708 |
** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case |
5709 |
letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search. |
5710 |
|
5711 |
** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables |
5712 |
are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant |
5713 |
command keys. |
5714 |
|
5715 |
** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for |
5716 |
user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions. |
5717 |
|
5718 |
Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for |
5719 |
user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at |
5720 |
all variables that have documentation. |
5721 |
|
5722 |
** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer |
5723 |
shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way |
5724 |
that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable |
5725 |
minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap |
5726 |
it should show; the default is 20. |
5727 |
|
5728 |
Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode, |
5729 |
the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole |
5730 |
of your input. |
5731 |
|
5732 |
** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize |
5733 |
all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in |
5734 |
recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as |
5735 |
argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all |
5736 |
the customizable options which were changed since that version. |
5737 |
Newly added options are included as well. |
5738 |
|
5739 |
If you don't specify a particular version number argument, |
5740 |
then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options |
5741 |
for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded. |
5742 |
|
5743 |
This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the |
5744 |
Customize menu. |
5745 |
|
5746 |
** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out |
5747 |
the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command. |
5748 |
|
5749 |
** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of |
5750 |
buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were |
5751 |
invoked. |
5752 |
|
5753 |
** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces |
5754 |
that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment. |
5755 |
The default is 1. |
5756 |
|
5757 |
** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol |
5758 |
syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has |
5759 |
new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram |
5760 |
(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block |
5761 |
sensibly. |
5762 |
|
5763 |
** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger. |
5764 |
|
5765 |
** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil |
5766 |
value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make |
5767 |
two entries in one day for one file, and combine them. |
5768 |
|
5769 |
** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a |
5770 |
reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string |
5771 |
for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically |
5772 |
every night. |
5773 |
|
5774 |
** Desktop changes |
5775 |
|
5776 |
*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set |
5777 |
the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom. |
5778 |
|
5779 |
*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored |
5780 |
and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'. |
5781 |
|
5782 |
** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to |
5783 |
read and post multi-lingual articles. |
5784 |
|
5785 |
** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when |
5786 |
doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should |
5787 |
be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden |
5788 |
outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and |
5789 |
the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is |
5790 |
made invisible again. |
5791 |
|
5792 |
** Mail reading and sending changes |
5793 |
|
5794 |
*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of |
5795 |
the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any |
5796 |
changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently |
5797 |
toggle. |
5798 |
|
5799 |
*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file, |
5800 |
now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the |
5801 |
summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if |
5802 |
the message has no subject, is stored in the variable |
5803 |
rmail-default-body-file. |
5804 |
|
5805 |
*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no |
5806 |
longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they |
5807 |
handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use. |
5808 |
|
5809 |
*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string, |
5810 |
it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression |
5811 |
is evaluated to insert the signature. |
5812 |
|
5813 |
*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of |
5814 |
outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email |
5815 |
handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for |
5816 |
putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for |
5817 |
transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be |
5818 |
especially interested in trying feedmail. |
5819 |
|
5820 |
feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of |
5821 |
feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features |
5822 |
provided by feedmail are: |
5823 |
|
5824 |
**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and |
5825 |
stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users); |
5826 |
there is also a queue for draft messages |
5827 |
|
5828 |
**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and |
5829 |
be prompted for confirmation |
5830 |
|
5831 |
**** does smart filling of address headers |
5832 |
|
5833 |
**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be |
5834 |
the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this |
5835 |
can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get |
5836 |
|
5837 |
**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting |
5838 |
the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail, |
5839 |
/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new |
5840 |
function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp) |
5841 |
|
5842 |
** Dired changes |
5843 |
|
5844 |
*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked |
5845 |
files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T". |
5846 |
|
5847 |
*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily |
5848 |
run Dired on the directory name at point. |
5849 |
|
5850 |
*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of |
5851 |
files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match |
5852 |
for a specified regexp. |
5853 |
|
5854 |
** VC Changes |
5855 |
|
5856 |
*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control |
5857 |
conveniently. |
5858 |
|
5859 |
*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much |
5860 |
faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary |
5861 |
Dired. |
5862 |
|
5863 |
VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the |
5864 |
directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive |
5865 |
listing of all files at or below the given directory which are |
5866 |
currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown). |
5867 |
|
5868 |
You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil, |
5869 |
then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set |
5870 |
vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version |
5871 |
control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i' |
5872 |
on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired. |
5873 |
|
5874 |
All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which |
5875 |
is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type |
5876 |
`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on |
5877 |
the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes |
5878 |
`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked. |
5879 |
|
5880 |
The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to |
5881 |
toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all |
5882 |
VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command, |
5883 |
`* l', to mark all files currently locked. |
5884 |
|
5885 |
Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in |
5886 |
ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls |
5887 |
command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output. |
5888 |
|
5889 |
*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working |
5890 |
file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff |
5891 |
session to resolve them. |
5892 |
|
5893 |
Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to |
5894 |
resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that |
5895 |
contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS |
5896 |
uses as well). |
5897 |
|
5898 |
*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new |
5899 |
command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When |
5900 |
you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify |
5901 |
either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that |
5902 |
branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file. |
5903 |
If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively, |
5904 |
using ediff. |
5905 |
|
5906 |
** Changes in Font Lock |
5907 |
|
5908 |
*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face |
5909 |
are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical |
5910 |
use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are |
5911 |
unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for |
5912 |
compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face. |
5913 |
|
5914 |
** Frame name display changes |
5915 |
|
5916 |
*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current |
5917 |
frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and |
5918 |
raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or |
5919 |
when many frames are invisible or iconified. |
5920 |
|
5921 |
*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the |
5922 |
frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames |
5923 |
menu. |
5924 |
|
5925 |
** Comint (subshell) changes |
5926 |
|
5927 |
*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a |
5928 |
subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility |
5929 |
with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this. |
5930 |
|
5931 |
*** There are new commands in Comint mode. |
5932 |
|
5933 |
C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history; |
5934 |
that is, the line after the last line you got. |
5935 |
You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one. |
5936 |
|
5937 |
C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to |
5938 |
send the current line together with the following line, when you send |
5939 |
the following line. |
5940 |
|
5941 |
C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark, |
5942 |
which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the |
5943 |
previously sent input. |
5944 |
|
5945 |
C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input; |
5946 |
it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input |
5947 |
as the search string. |
5948 |
|
5949 |
*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll |
5950 |
automatically in compilation-mode windows. |
5951 |
|
5952 |
** C mode changes |
5953 |
|
5954 |
*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation, |
5955 |
and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is |
5956 |
assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro |
5957 |
definition. |
5958 |
|
5959 |
*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified |
5960 |
(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations. |
5961 |
Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu" |
5962 |
style is still the default however. |
5963 |
|
5964 |
*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style. |
5965 |
|
5966 |
*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which |
5967 |
are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer |
5968 |
them. They do not have key bindings by default. |
5969 |
|
5970 |
*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement) |
5971 |
and M-e (c-end-of-statement). |
5972 |
|
5973 |
*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols |
5974 |
namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace. |
5975 |
|
5976 |
*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets |
5977 |
makes the style variables local to that buffer only. |
5978 |
|
5979 |
*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren, |
5980 |
c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change. |
5981 |
|
5982 |
*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You |
5983 |
should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire |
5984 |
package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new |
5985 |
variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default. |
5986 |
|
5987 |
** Changes to hippie-expand. |
5988 |
|
5989 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If |
5990 |
non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for, |
5991 |
which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'. |
5992 |
|
5993 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If |
5994 |
non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when |
5995 |
expanding dynamically. |
5996 |
|
5997 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If |
5998 |
non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched. |
5999 |
|
6000 |
*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If |
6001 |
non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in |
6002 |
this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose |
6003 |
expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'. |
6004 |
|
6005 |
*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied. |
6006 |
|
6007 |
** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
6008 |
|
6009 |
*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable |
6010 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during |
6011 |
automatic key generation. This replaces variable |
6012 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches |
6013 |
against the first word in the title. |
6014 |
|
6015 |
*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just |
6016 |
capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations, |
6017 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with |
6018 |
lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use |
6019 |
lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the |
6020 |
bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting. |
6021 |
|
6022 |
*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key |
6023 |
generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is |
6024 |
replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and |
6025 |
bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert. |
6026 |
|
6027 |
** Changes in vcursor.el. |
6028 |
|
6029 |
*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap |
6030 |
and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A |
6031 |
variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be |
6032 |
entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including |
6033 |
`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency |
6034 |
in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps. |
6035 |
|
6036 |
*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the |
6037 |
Editing group once the package is loaded. |
6038 |
|
6039 |
*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is |
6040 |
generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set |
6041 |
vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behavior. |
6042 |
|
6043 |
*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the |
6044 |
vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command. |
6045 |
|
6046 |
** Ispell changes. |
6047 |
|
6048 |
*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current |
6049 |
buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings |
6050 |
are identified by syntax tables in effect. |
6051 |
|
6052 |
*** Generic region skipping implemented. |
6053 |
A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will |
6054 |
and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user |
6055 |
defined. New applications and improvements made available by this |
6056 |
include: |
6057 |
|
6058 |
o URLs are automatically skipped |
6059 |
o EMail message checking is vastly improved. |
6060 |
|
6061 |
*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals. |
6062 |
|
6063 |
** Changes to RefTeX mode |
6064 |
|
6065 |
RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very |
6066 |
large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been |
6067 |
re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the |
6068 |
section `Optimizations' in the manual. |
6069 |
|
6070 |
*** New recursive parser. |
6071 |
|
6072 |
The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the |
6073 |
entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new |
6074 |
recursive parser scans the individual files. |
6075 |
|
6076 |
*** Parsing only part of a document. |
6077 |
|
6078 |
Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling |
6079 |
partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of |
6080 |
the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t. |
6081 |
|
6082 |
(setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) |
6083 |
|
6084 |
*** Storing parsing information in a file. |
6085 |
|
6086 |
This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use |
6087 |
|
6088 |
(setq reftex-save-parse-info t) |
6089 |
|
6090 |
*** Using multiple selection buffers |
6091 |
|
6092 |
If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens |
6093 |
for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting |
6094 |
|
6095 |
(setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) |
6096 |
|
6097 |
*** References to external documents. |
6098 |
|
6099 |
The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external |
6100 |
documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external |
6101 |
documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument |
6102 |
macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with |
6103 |
RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in |
6104 |
the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )'). |
6105 |
The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer. |
6106 |
|
6107 |
*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default. |
6108 |
|
6109 |
The built-in command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands, |
6110 |
and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution. |
6111 |
|
6112 |
Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes |
6113 |
the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly. |
6114 |
|
6115 |
*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers |
6116 |
|
6117 |
The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc* |
6118 |
buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'. |
6119 |
|
6120 |
*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes. |
6121 |
|
6122 |
The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of |
6123 |
contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map', |
6124 |
`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes |
6125 |
have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you |
6126 |
enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?' |
6127 |
at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out |
6128 |
more. |
6129 |
|
6130 |
*** Support for the varioref package |
6131 |
|
6132 |
The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref. |
6133 |
|
6134 |
*** New hooks |
6135 |
|
6136 |
Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references, |
6137 |
and citations are created. These hooks are |
6138 |
`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function', |
6139 |
`reftex-format-cite-function'. |
6140 |
|
6141 |
*** Citations outside LaTeX |
6142 |
|
6143 |
The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in |
6144 |
a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details. |
6145 |
|
6146 |
*** Short context is no longer fontified. |
6147 |
|
6148 |
The short context in the label menu no longer copies the |
6149 |
fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be |
6150 |
fontified, use |
6151 |
|
6152 |
(setq reftex-refontify-context t) |
6153 |
|
6154 |
** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument. |
6155 |
With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of |
6156 |
the file name within its directory; it only checks for other |
6157 |
directories that contain the same file name. |
6158 |
|
6159 |
Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file |
6160 |
Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary |
6161 |
file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to |
6162 |
Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that |
6163 |
have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer |
6164 |
names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other |
6165 |
directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present |
6166 |
directory. |
6167 |
|
6168 |
** New modes and packages |
6169 |
|
6170 |
*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode. |
6171 |
It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer |
6172 |
it, but some do not. |
6173 |
|
6174 |
*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL |
6175 |
code. |
6176 |
|
6177 |
*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the |
6178 |
current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move |
6179 |
around in a buffer. |
6180 |
|
6181 |
Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu. |
6182 |
|
6183 |
*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author |
6184 |
uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should |
6185 |
be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an |
6186 |
established system of notation similar to Chess. |
6187 |
|
6188 |
*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp |
6189 |
documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style |
6190 |
guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual. |
6191 |
|
6192 |
*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features |
6193 |
available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around |
6194 |
system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of |
6195 |
simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also |
6196 |
functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and |
6197 |
the like. |
6198 |
|
6199 |
*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to |
6200 |
identify recently changed parts of the buffer text. |
6201 |
|
6202 |
*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done |
6203 |
within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not |
6204 |
used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize |
6205 |
the user option `midnight-mode' to t. |
6206 |
|
6207 |
*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes. |
6208 |
|
6209 |
apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files |
6210 |
samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files |
6211 |
fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files |
6212 |
x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files |
6213 |
hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc) |
6214 |
mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files |
6215 |
javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files |
6216 |
vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files |
6217 |
java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files |
6218 |
java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files |
6219 |
mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files |
6220 |
|
6221 |
Platform-specific modes: |
6222 |
|
6223 |
prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files |
6224 |
pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files |
6225 |
alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files |
6226 |
inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files |
6227 |
ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files |
6228 |
reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files |
6229 |
bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts |
6230 |
rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files |
6231 |
rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts |
6232 |
|
6233 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
6234 |
|
6235 |
** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, |
6236 |
use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. |
6237 |
That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode. |
6238 |
Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode. |
6239 |
|
6240 |
Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether |
6241 |
you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives |
6242 |
consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started. |
6243 |
|
6244 |
** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist, |
6245 |
and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can |
6246 |
specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for |
6247 |
searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions. |
6248 |
|
6249 |
** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and |
6250 |
multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte |
6251 |
character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language |
6252 |
environment. |
6253 |
|
6254 |
** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now |
6255 |
take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt |
6256 |
string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the |
6257 |
current input method for reading this one event. |
6258 |
|
6259 |
** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte |
6260 |
now control whether to output certain characters as |
6261 |
backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte |
6262 |
non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte |
6263 |
characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing |
6264 |
in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not). |
6265 |
|
6266 |
* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published |
6267 |
|
6268 |
** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version |
6269 |
of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3. |
6270 |
|
6271 |
** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were |
6272 |
in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1) |
6273 |
always increases point by 1. |
6274 |
|
6275 |
The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is |
6276 |
considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted. |
6277 |
|
6278 |
See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters. |
6279 |
|
6280 |
** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'. |
6281 |
Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's |
6282 |
default value changed. For example, |
6283 |
|
6284 |
(defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed." |
6285 |
:type 'integer |
6286 |
:group 'foo |
6287 |
:version "20.3") |
6288 |
|
6289 |
(defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group." |
6290 |
:version "20.3") |
6291 |
|
6292 |
If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the |
6293 |
default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It |
6294 |
is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a |
6295 |
`:version' in the top level group. |
6296 |
|
6297 |
This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command. |
6298 |
|
6299 |
** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name |
6300 |
starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray. |
6301 |
|
6302 |
However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that |
6303 |
symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that |
6304 |
support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables |
6305 |
to themselves. |
6306 |
|
6307 |
If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil, |
6308 |
this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any |
6309 |
values whatever. |
6310 |
|
6311 |
** There is a new debugger command, R. |
6312 |
It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result |
6313 |
in the buffer *Debugger-record*. |
6314 |
|
6315 |
** Frame-local variables. |
6316 |
|
6317 |
You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call |
6318 |
the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have |
6319 |
local bindings for that variable. |
6320 |
|
6321 |
These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a |
6322 |
frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling |
6323 |
modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the |
6324 |
parameter name. |
6325 |
|
6326 |
Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings. |
6327 |
Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is |
6328 |
active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding, |
6329 |
that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active. |
6330 |
|
6331 |
It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not |
6332 |
clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a |
6333 |
very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect |
6334 |
through a window-local binding would not be very robust. |
6335 |
|
6336 |
** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing |
6337 |
"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when |
6338 |
evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form |
6339 |
makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns. |
6340 |
See the documentation in sregex.el. |
6341 |
|
6342 |
** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which |
6343 |
is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to |
6344 |
parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended. |
6345 |
The contents of this field are not yet finalized. |
6346 |
|
6347 |
** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION. |
6348 |
If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'. |
6349 |
|
6350 |
** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from |
6351 |
known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can |
6352 |
define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead. |
6353 |
|
6354 |
** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE |
6355 |
when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as |
6356 |
it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the |
6357 |
history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default. |
6358 |
|
6359 |
The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to |
6360 |
return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters |
6361 |
empty input. |
6362 |
|
6363 |
** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use |
6364 |
for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to |
6365 |
`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names. |
6366 |
Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as |
6367 |
`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string. |
6368 |
|
6369 |
** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal, |
6370 |
echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments: |
6371 |
a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a |
6372 |
default password to use if the user enters nothing. |
6373 |
|
6374 |
** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to |
6375 |
specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a |
6376 |
function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the |
6377 |
place where a break is being considered. If the function returns |
6378 |
non-nil, then the line won't be broken there. |
6379 |
|
6380 |
** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE. |
6381 |
If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate |
6382 |
up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the |
6383 |
end of the window, even if this requires computation. |
6384 |
|
6385 |
** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME |
6386 |
which specifies which frame's buffer list to use. |
6387 |
If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list. |
6388 |
|
6389 |
** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer, |
6390 |
holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window |
6391 |
was directed to display this buffer. |
6392 |
|
6393 |
** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects |
6394 |
with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they |
6395 |
describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in |
6396 |
other words, if they would give the same results if passed to |
6397 |
set-window-configuration. |
6398 |
|
6399 |
** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two |
6400 |
window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer |
6401 |
positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of |
6402 |
windows and the choice of buffers to display. |
6403 |
|
6404 |
** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to |
6405 |
override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist |
6406 |
look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP). |
6407 |
|
6408 |
If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a |
6409 |
non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the |
6410 |
map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist. |
6411 |
|
6412 |
minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers, |
6413 |
and it is meant to be set by major modes. |
6414 |
|
6415 |
** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string |
6416 |
except that it discards all text properties from the result. |
6417 |
|
6418 |
** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument |
6419 |
USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as |
6420 |
floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100. |
6421 |
|
6422 |
** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory |
6423 |
to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined |
6424 |
in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems |
6425 |
it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables. |
6426 |
|
6427 |
** Menu changes |
6428 |
|
6429 |
*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the |
6430 |
keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now |
6431 |
better supported. |
6432 |
|
6433 |
The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls |
6434 |
a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when |
6435 |
you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you |
6436 |
can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature; |
6437 |
then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar. |
6438 |
|
6439 |
*** A new format for menu items is supported. |
6440 |
|
6441 |
In a keymap, a key binding that has the format |
6442 |
(STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING) |
6443 |
defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that |
6444 |
starts with the symbol `menu-item'. |
6445 |
|
6446 |
The format is: |
6447 |
(menu-item ITEM-NAME) or |
6448 |
(menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST) |
6449 |
where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item |
6450 |
string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list. |
6451 |
The supported properties include |
6452 |
|
6453 |
:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
6454 |
item is enabled. |
6455 |
:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the |
6456 |
item should appear in the menu. |
6457 |
:filter FILTER-FN |
6458 |
FILTER-FN is a function of one argument, |
6459 |
which will be REAL-BINDING. |
6460 |
It should return a binding to use instead. |
6461 |
:keys DESCRIPTION |
6462 |
DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard |
6463 |
binding for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with |
6464 |
`substitute-command-keys' before it is used. |
6465 |
:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE |
6466 |
KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent |
6467 |
keyboard binding. |
6468 |
:key-sequence nil |
6469 |
This means that the command normally has no |
6470 |
keyboard equivalent. |
6471 |
:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used). |
6472 |
:button (TYPE . SELECTED) |
6473 |
TYPE is :toggle or :radio. |
6474 |
SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its |
6475 |
value says whether this button is currently selected. |
6476 |
|
6477 |
Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu. |
6478 |
Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported. |
6479 |
|
6480 |
(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item. |
6481 |
|
6482 |
** New event types |
6483 |
|
6484 |
*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a |
6485 |
mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that |
6486 |
corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated, |
6487 |
which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is: |
6488 |
|
6489 |
(mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA) |
6490 |
|
6491 |
where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
6492 |
same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number |
6493 |
indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A |
6494 |
negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards |
6495 |
the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated |
6496 |
forward, away from the user. |
6497 |
|
6498 |
As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
6499 |
|
6500 |
*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of |
6501 |
files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged |
6502 |
and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of |
6503 |
filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically |
6504 |
loaded into Emacs. The format is: |
6505 |
|
6506 |
(drag-n-drop POSITION FILES) |
6507 |
|
6508 |
where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the |
6509 |
same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames |
6510 |
that were dragged and dropped. |
6511 |
|
6512 |
As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows. |
6513 |
|
6514 |
** Changes relating to multibyte characters. |
6515 |
|
6516 |
*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only; |
6517 |
any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way |
6518 |
to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte. |
6519 |
|
6520 |
*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You |
6521 |
can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character |
6522 |
that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape. |
6523 |
|
6524 |
*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were |
6525 |
in Emacs 19 and before. |
6526 |
|
6527 |
The function chars-in-string has been deleted. |
6528 |
The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'. |
6529 |
|
6530 |
*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current |
6531 |
buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or |
6532 |
unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte |
6533 |
representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation. |
6534 |
|
6535 |
This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed |
6536 |
as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents |
6537 |
viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as |
6538 |
one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation |
6539 |
will count as two characters using unibyte representation. |
6540 |
|
6541 |
This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which |
6542 |
representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer |
6543 |
(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are |
6544 |
consistent with the new representation. |
6545 |
|
6546 |
*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte |
6547 |
representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care |
6548 |
about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary; |
6549 |
however, it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
6550 |
|
6551 |
The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of |
6552 |
nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them |
6553 |
using the table nonascii-translation-table. |
6554 |
|
6555 |
*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte |
6556 |
representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the |
6557 |
representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings. |
6558 |
|
6559 |
The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation |
6560 |
loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically |
6561 |
is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer. |
6562 |
|
6563 |
*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
6564 |
which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte. |
6565 |
|
6566 |
*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string |
6567 |
which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte. |
6568 |
|
6569 |
*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare |
6570 |
portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte, |
6571 |
so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string. |
6572 |
You can specify whether to ignore case or not. |
6573 |
|
6574 |
*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that |
6575 |
it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal. |
6576 |
|
6577 |
*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now |
6578 |
convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the |
6579 |
buffer or string being searched. |
6580 |
|
6581 |
One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of |
6582 |
[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when |
6583 |
searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when |
6584 |
searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no |
6585 |
obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what |
6586 |
you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular |
6587 |
expression [^\0-\177] works for it. |
6588 |
|
6589 |
*** Structure of coding system changed. |
6590 |
|
6591 |
All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named |
6592 |
by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector |
6593 |
which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector |
6594 |
as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this |
6595 |
vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define |
6596 |
your own alias name of a coding system by the function |
6597 |
define-coding-system-alias. |
6598 |
|
6599 |
The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use |
6600 |
the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to |
6601 |
access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion, |
6602 |
pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode, |
6603 |
character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and |
6604 |
safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 |
6605 |
'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter |
6606 |
`iso-8859-1'. |
6607 |
|
6608 |
Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new. |
6609 |
The value of this property is a list of character sets which this |
6610 |
coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance: |
6611 |
(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1) |
6612 |
|
6613 |
Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can |
6614 |
also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they |
6615 |
are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode |
6616 |
the other character sets and read it back correctly. |
6617 |
|
6618 |
*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a |
6619 |
proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string. |
6620 |
This function requires a user interaction. |
6621 |
|
6622 |
*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and |
6623 |
find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by |
6624 |
select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding |
6625 |
systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want |
6626 |
a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of |
6627 |
select-safe-coding-system. |
6628 |
|
6629 |
*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as |
6630 |
decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set |
6631 |
last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding |
6632 |
was done. |
6633 |
|
6634 |
*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be |
6635 |
used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of |
6636 |
coding systems used by some specific language environment. |
6637 |
|
6638 |
*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always |
6639 |
return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII |
6640 |
characters are found, they now return a list of single element |
6641 |
`undecided' or its subsidiaries. |
6642 |
|
6643 |
*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and |
6644 |
coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different |
6645 |
coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is |
6646 |
converted. |
6647 |
|
6648 |
*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a |
6649 |
coding system for communicating with other X clients. |
6650 |
|
6651 |
*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid |
6652 |
character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire |
6653 |
character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words, |
6654 |
each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value |
6655 |
either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a |
6656 |
range of characters. |
6657 |
|
6658 |
*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a |
6659 |
Lisp object is a valid character code or not. |
6660 |
|
6661 |
*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character |
6662 |
in the current buffer at position POS. |
6663 |
|
6664 |
*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable |
6665 |
input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a |
6666 |
function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing |
6667 |
character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the |
6668 |
event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first |
6669 |
binding input-method-function to nil. |
6670 |
|
6671 |
The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input |
6672 |
method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as |
6673 |
input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by |
6674 |
the input method function are not passed to the input method function, |
6675 |
not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits. |
6676 |
|
6677 |
The input method function is not called when reading the second and |
6678 |
subsequent events of a key sequence. |
6679 |
|
6680 |
*** You can customize any language environment by using |
6681 |
set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook. |
6682 |
|
6683 |
The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo |
6684 |
customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For |
6685 |
instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language |
6686 |
environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up |
6687 |
exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding. |
6688 |
|
6689 |
* Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
6690 |
|
6691 |
** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user |
6692 |
options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look |
6693 |
at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a |
6694 |
tree structure. |
6695 |
|
6696 |
M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each |
6697 |
user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values. |
6698 |
|
6699 |
With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs |
6700 |
session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically |
6701 |
in your .emacs file.) |
6702 |
|
6703 |
** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window. |
6704 |
You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode. |
6705 |
|
6706 |
** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'. |
6707 |
This makes more space in the mode line for other information. |
6708 |
|
6709 |
** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted |
6710 |
immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it |
6711 |
kills the region. |
6712 |
|
6713 |
The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they |
6714 |
delete the character before point, as usual. |
6715 |
|
6716 |
** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted |
6717 |
on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature |
6718 |
by setting search-highlight to nil.) |
6719 |
|
6720 |
** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to |
6721 |
insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect, |
6722 |
the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked |
6723 |
onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the |
6724 |
history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the |
6725 |
past.) |
6726 |
|
6727 |
** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs. |
6728 |
This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode |
6729 |
in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode). |
6730 |
TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this |
6731 |
makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs. |
6732 |
|
6733 |
As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode, |
6734 |
and is an alias for it. |
6735 |
|
6736 |
If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph, |
6737 |
use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode. |
6738 |
|
6739 |
** Scrolling changes |
6740 |
|
6741 |
*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen |
6742 |
position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil. |
6743 |
|
6744 |
In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing |
6745 |
on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line |
6746 |
where it started. |
6747 |
|
6748 |
*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you |
6749 |
move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the |
6750 |
screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that |
6751 |
does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines. |
6752 |
|
6753 |
*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the |
6754 |
top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point |
6755 |
comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs |
6756 |
recenters the window. |
6757 |
|
6758 |
** International character set support (MULE) |
6759 |
|
6760 |
Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets, |
6761 |
including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese, |
6762 |
Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese, |
6763 |
Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These |
6764 |
features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as |
6765 |
MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs") |
6766 |
|
6767 |
Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard |
6768 |
coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte |
6769 |
character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide |
6770 |
variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back |
6771 |
into any of these coding systems when saving a file. |
6772 |
|
6773 |
Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used, |
6774 |
generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs |
6775 |
supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or |
6776 |
language, to make it possible to type them. |
6777 |
|
6778 |
The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII |
6779 |
character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377. |
6780 |
|
6781 |
The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain |
6782 |
to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods. |
6783 |
|
6784 |
You can disable multibyte character support as follows: |
6785 |
|
6786 |
(setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil) |
6787 |
|
6788 |
Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte |
6789 |
characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second |
6790 |
argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are |
6791 |
already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte |
6792 |
characters for their work until they want to change. |
6793 |
|
6794 |
*** Input methods |
6795 |
|
6796 |
An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed |
6797 |
specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language |
6798 |
has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use |
6799 |
the same characters can share one input method). Some languages |
6800 |
support several input methods. |
6801 |
|
6802 |
The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into |
6803 |
another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods |
6804 |
work. |
6805 |
|
6806 |
A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of |
6807 |
characters into one letter. Many European input methods use |
6808 |
composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which |
6809 |
consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one |
6810 |
sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single |
6811 |
letter. |
6812 |
|
6813 |
The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed |
6814 |
by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way. |
6815 |
First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone |
6816 |
marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are |
6817 |
mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character". |
6818 |
|
6819 |
None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so |
6820 |
they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using |
6821 |
phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs |
6822 |
converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary. |
6823 |
|
6824 |
Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled |
6825 |
word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use; |
6826 |
typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if |
6827 |
the first guess is wrong. |
6828 |
|
6829 |
*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters) |
6830 |
turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer. |
6831 |
|
6832 |
If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each |
6833 |
byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as |
6834 |
they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for |
6835 |
the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2. |
6836 |
|
6837 |
However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to |
6838 |
use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set |
6839 |
includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can |
6840 |
translate automatically to and from either one. |
6841 |
|
6842 |
*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode. |
6843 |
|
6844 |
Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a |
6845 |
file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte |
6846 |
sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not |
6847 |
what you want. |
6848 |
|
6849 |
If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for |
6850 |
example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding |
6851 |
system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off |
6852 |
multibyte characters in that buffer. |
6853 |
|
6854 |
If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off |
6855 |
character conversion as well. |
6856 |
|
6857 |
*** Displaying international characters on X Windows. |
6858 |
|
6859 |
A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script. |
6860 |
Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports |
6861 |
requires using many fonts. |
6862 |
|
6863 |
Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a |
6864 |
collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes. |
6865 |
|
6866 |
A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by |
6867 |
the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you |
6868 |
have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as |
6869 |
you would use a font. |
6870 |
|
6871 |
If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it |
6872 |
specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot |
6873 |
display that character. It will display an empty box instead. |
6874 |
|
6875 |
The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters |
6876 |
(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII |
6877 |
characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height, |
6878 |
or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped, |
6879 |
and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil. |
6880 |
|
6881 |
*** Defining fontsets. |
6882 |
|
6883 |
Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still |
6884 |
chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset |
6885 |
with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource. |
6886 |
|
6887 |
Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value |
6888 |
of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is |
6889 |
`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the |
6890 |
standard fontset are created automatically. |
6891 |
|
6892 |
If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn' |
6893 |
argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the |
6894 |
FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name |
6895 |
with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short |
6896 |
name is `fontset-startup'. |
6897 |
|
6898 |
Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2... |
6899 |
The resource value should have this form: |
6900 |
FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]... |
6901 |
FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except: |
6902 |
* most fields should be just the wild card "*". |
6903 |
* the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset" |
6904 |
* the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset. |
6905 |
The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number |
6906 |
of times; each time specifies the font for one character set. |
6907 |
CHARSET-NAME should be the name of a character set, and FONT-NAME |
6908 |
should specify an actual font to use for that character set. |
6909 |
|
6910 |
Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the |
6911 |
last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING. |
6912 |
You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name. |
6913 |
|
6914 |
For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a |
6915 |
font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the |
6916 |
following resource, |
6917 |
Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24 |
6918 |
the font for ASCII is generated as below: |
6919 |
-*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1 |
6920 |
Here is the substitution rule: |
6921 |
Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset |
6922 |
defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has |
6923 |
the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce |
6924 |
sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-. |
6925 |
(This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.) |
6926 |
|
6927 |
The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the |
6928 |
fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call |
6929 |
that function explicitly to create a fontset. |
6930 |
|
6931 |
With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just |
6932 |
like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset |
6933 |
name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the |
6934 |
fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle |
6935 |
fontsets. |
6936 |
|
6937 |
*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs |
6938 |
defaults for a particular choice of language. |
6939 |
|
6940 |
Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input |
6941 |
method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when |
6942 |
visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have |
6943 |
already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The |
6944 |
language environment may also specify a default choice of coding |
6945 |
system for new files that you create. |
6946 |
|
6947 |
It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use |
6948 |
set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the |
6949 |
whole Emacs session. |
6950 |
|
6951 |
For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET |
6952 |
chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this |
6953 |
with (set-language-environment "Latin-1"). |
6954 |
|
6955 |
*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) |
6956 |
specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This |
6957 |
specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving |
6958 |
the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the |
6959 |
coding systems that Emacs supports. |
6960 |
|
6961 |
*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument) |
6962 |
lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file. |
6963 |
This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name. |
6964 |
After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system |
6965 |
is used for *the immediately following command*. |
6966 |
|
6967 |
So if the immediately following command is a command to read or |
6968 |
write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file. |
6969 |
|
6970 |
If the immediately following command does not use the coding system, |
6971 |
then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect. |
6972 |
|
6973 |
For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET |
6974 |
visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1. |
6975 |
|
6976 |
*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*- |
6977 |
construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*- |
6978 |
to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also |
6979 |
specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end |
6980 |
of the file. |
6981 |
|
6982 |
*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies |
6983 |
the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character |
6984 |
code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are |
6985 |
translated into that character code. |
6986 |
|
6987 |
This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in |
6988 |
various countries to support the languages of those countries. |
6989 |
|
6990 |
By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all. |
6991 |
|
6992 |
*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies |
6993 |
the coding system for keyboard input. |
6994 |
|
6995 |
Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals |
6996 |
with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example, |
6997 |
some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it. |
6998 |
|
6999 |
By default, keyboard input is not translated at all. |
7000 |
|
7001 |
Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an |
7002 |
input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that |
7003 |
translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed |
7004 |
to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are |
7005 |
designed to work with terminals. |
7006 |
|
7007 |
*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system) |
7008 |
specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess. |
7009 |
This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess |
7010 |
has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify |
7011 |
translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command |
7012 |
in the corresponding buffer. |
7013 |
|
7014 |
By default, process input and output are not translated at all. |
7015 |
|
7016 |
*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system |
7017 |
to use for encoding file names before operating on them. |
7018 |
It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system. |
7019 |
|
7020 |
*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates |
7021 |
an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the |
7022 |
command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you |
7023 |
want to use. |
7024 |
|
7025 |
C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input |
7026 |
method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method. |
7027 |
|
7028 |
*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard |
7029 |
layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this |
7030 |
remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify |
7031 |
which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout. |
7032 |
|
7033 |
*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays |
7034 |
the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus |
7035 |
related information. |
7036 |
|
7037 |
*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called |
7038 |
HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various |
7039 |
scripts. |
7040 |
|
7041 |
*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays |
7042 |
information about the support for a particular language. |
7043 |
You specify the language as an argument. |
7044 |
|
7045 |
*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies |
7046 |
the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the |
7047 |
first dash. |
7048 |
|
7049 |
A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion |
7050 |
(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion |
7051 |
whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits |
7052 |
1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters: |
7053 |
|
7054 |
A alternativnyj (Russian) |
7055 |
B big5 (Chinese) |
7056 |
C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese) |
7057 |
C iso-2022-cn (Chinese) |
7058 |
D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages) |
7059 |
E euc-japan (Japanese) |
7060 |
I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
7061 |
J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese) |
7062 |
K euc-korea (Korean) |
7063 |
R koi8 (Russian) |
7064 |
Q tibetan |
7065 |
S shift_jis (Japanese) |
7066 |
T lao |
7067 |
T tis620 (Thai) |
7068 |
V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese) |
7069 |
i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean) |
7070 |
k iso-2022-kr (Korean) |
7071 |
v viqr (Vietnamese) |
7072 |
z hz (Chinese) |
7073 |
|
7074 |
When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system), |
7075 |
two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file |
7076 |
coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for |
7077 |
keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output. |
7078 |
|
7079 |
*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code |
7080 |
conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil. |
7081 |
|
7082 |
When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically |
7083 |
into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with |
7084 |
rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing |
7085 |
Rmail files themselves. |
7086 |
|
7087 |
*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code |
7088 |
conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil. |
7089 |
|
7090 |
Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system |
7091 |
for sending mail: |
7092 |
|
7093 |
- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority. |
7094 |
- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it. |
7095 |
- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used, |
7096 |
if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment. |
7097 |
- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used. |
7098 |
|
7099 |
*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument |
7100 |
to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English, |
7101 |
Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional |
7102 |
translations. |
7103 |
|
7104 |
** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion |
7105 |
of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command |
7106 |
insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer |
7107 |
without any conversion. |
7108 |
|
7109 |
** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed. |
7110 |
You can now specify any number of octal digits. |
7111 |
RET terminates the digits and is discarded; |
7112 |
any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input. |
7113 |
|
7114 |
** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for |
7115 |
functions, variables and file names used in your programs. |
7116 |
|
7117 |
Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point. |
7118 |
Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point. |
7119 |
|
7120 |
Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major |
7121 |
mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used. |
7122 |
|
7123 |
** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command |
7124 |
complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name |
7125 |
in the buffer before point. |
7126 |
|
7127 |
With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of |
7128 |
symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that |
7129 |
you are using. |
7130 |
|
7131 |
With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables, |
7132 |
just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag). |
7133 |
|
7134 |
** File locking works with NFS now. |
7135 |
|
7136 |
The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME, |
7137 |
in the same directory as FILENAME. |
7138 |
|
7139 |
This means that collision detection between two different machines now |
7140 |
works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory |
7141 |
can become a bottleneck. |
7142 |
|
7143 |
The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection |
7144 |
does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot |
7145 |
create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the |
7146 |
file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are |
7147 |
rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is |
7148 |
so useful that the change is worth while. |
7149 |
|
7150 |
When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which |
7151 |
are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious |
7152 |
collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just |
7153 |
tell Emacs to go ahead anyway. |
7154 |
|
7155 |
** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses, |
7156 |
it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call |
7157 |
show-paren-mode. |
7158 |
|
7159 |
** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted |
7160 |
selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load |
7161 |
delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode. |
7162 |
|
7163 |
** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words |
7164 |
within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load |
7165 |
complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode. |
7166 |
|
7167 |
** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you, |
7168 |
it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also |
7169 |
set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values. |
7170 |
|
7171 |
** Changes in View mode. |
7172 |
|
7173 |
*** Several new commands are available in View mode. |
7174 |
Do H in view mode for a list of commands. |
7175 |
|
7176 |
*** There are two new commands for entering View mode: |
7177 |
view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame. |
7178 |
|
7179 |
*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their |
7180 |
previous state. |
7181 |
|
7182 |
*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil, |
7183 |
scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit. |
7184 |
|
7185 |
*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If |
7186 |
non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer, |
7187 |
not just the selected window. |
7188 |
|
7189 |
*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a |
7190 |
read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only |
7191 |
turns View mode on or off. |
7192 |
|
7193 |
*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls |
7194 |
how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil, |
7195 |
delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it. |
7196 |
|
7197 |
** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log, |
7198 |
now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version. |
7199 |
|
7200 |
** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version, |
7201 |
has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is |
7202 |
presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks |
7203 |
which version to compare with. |
7204 |
|
7205 |
** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden |
7206 |
blocks if a match is inside the block. |
7207 |
|
7208 |
The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match |
7209 |
is outside the block. By customizing the variable |
7210 |
isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily |
7211 |
shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search. |
7212 |
|
7213 |
By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind |
7214 |
of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code |
7215 |
blocks, all of them or none. |
7216 |
|
7217 |
** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the |
7218 |
current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for |
7219 |
confirmation first. |
7220 |
|
7221 |
** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name, |
7222 |
now changes the major mode according to that file name. |
7223 |
However, the mode will not be changed if |
7224 |
(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or |
7225 |
(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode, |
7226 |
not suitable for ordinary files, or |
7227 |
(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode. |
7228 |
|
7229 |
This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well. |
7230 |
|
7231 |
However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then |
7232 |
these commands do not change the major mode. |
7233 |
|
7234 |
** M-x occur changes. |
7235 |
|
7236 |
*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters, |
7237 |
it performs a case-sensitive search. |
7238 |
|
7239 |
*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur, |
7240 |
if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search |
7241 |
using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before. |
7242 |
|
7243 |
** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted |
7244 |
in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the |
7245 |
window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in |
7246 |
that window unless you select to another window which shows the same |
7247 |
buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window. |
7248 |
|
7249 |
** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates |
7250 |
after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings |
7251 |
appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents |
7252 |
come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information. |
7253 |
|
7254 |
** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
7255 |
selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the |
7256 |
buffers recently selected in the selected frame. |
7257 |
|
7258 |
** Outline mode changes. |
7259 |
|
7260 |
*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el). |
7261 |
|
7262 |
*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode. |
7263 |
|
7264 |
** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if |
7265 |
you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer. |
7266 |
Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that |
7267 |
was already active. |
7268 |
|
7269 |
The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not |
7270 |
unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then |
7271 |
get confused by it. |
7272 |
|
7273 |
If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must |
7274 |
set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil. |
7275 |
|
7276 |
** Changes in dynamic abbrevs. |
7277 |
|
7278 |
*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case |
7279 |
conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first |
7280 |
character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion |
7281 |
including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim. |
7282 |
|
7283 |
The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has |
7284 |
mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always |
7285 |
copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps. |
7286 |
|
7287 |
*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search' |
7288 |
are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible |
7289 |
values. |
7290 |
|
7291 |
`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve |
7292 |
case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace). |
7293 |
`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore |
7294 |
case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search). |
7295 |
|
7296 |
** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a |
7297 |
certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they |
7298 |
can be. The default value is 30. |
7299 |
|
7300 |
** Changes in Mail mode. |
7301 |
|
7302 |
*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly. |
7303 |
Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail |
7304 |
composition mechanism you have selected with the variable |
7305 |
`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is |
7306 |
`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old |
7307 |
behavior. |
7308 |
|
7309 |
C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs |
7310 |
compose-mail-other-frame. |
7311 |
|
7312 |
*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use |
7313 |
the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are |
7314 |
replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the |
7315 |
buffer that shows the original message. |
7316 |
|
7317 |
*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message, |
7318 |
with separator lines around the contents. |
7319 |
|
7320 |
*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases |
7321 |
in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias |
7322 |
definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not |
7323 |
need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail. |
7324 |
|
7325 |
*** New features in the mail-complete command. |
7326 |
|
7327 |
**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name, |
7328 |
for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style |
7329 |
controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all. |
7330 |
Its values are like those of mail-from-style. |
7331 |
|
7332 |
**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command |
7333 |
to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in |
7334 |
/etc/passwd. |
7335 |
|
7336 |
**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read |
7337 |
to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used: |
7338 |
/etc/passwd. |
7339 |
|
7340 |
** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of |
7341 |
special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a |
7342 |
directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a |
7343 |
reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'. |
7344 |
|
7345 |
Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as |
7346 |
when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise |
7347 |
be taken to be magic. |
7348 |
|
7349 |
** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select |
7350 |
files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is |
7351 |
available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep. |
7352 |
|
7353 |
M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that. |
7354 |
(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.) |
7355 |
|
7356 |
** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names |
7357 |
suggest they are probably not needed in the long run. |
7358 |
|
7359 |
In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands. |
7360 |
|
7361 |
new key dired.el binding old key |
7362 |
------- ---------------- ------- |
7363 |
* c dired-change-marks c |
7364 |
* m dired-mark m |
7365 |
* * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted) |
7366 |
* / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted) |
7367 |
* @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted) |
7368 |
* u dired-unmark u |
7369 |
* DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL |
7370 |
* ? dired-unmark-all-files C-M-? |
7371 |
* ! dired-unmark-all-marks |
7372 |
* % dired-mark-files-regexp % m |
7373 |
* C-n dired-next-marked-file M-} |
7374 |
* C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{ |
7375 |
|
7376 |
** Rmail changes. |
7377 |
|
7378 |
*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it |
7379 |
saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer |
7380 |
chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing |
7381 |
each time you run it. |
7382 |
|
7383 |
*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls |
7384 |
whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes. |
7385 |
|
7386 |
*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete |
7387 |
messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument |
7388 |
means to move in the opposite direction. |
7389 |
|
7390 |
*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets |
7391 |
you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned. |
7392 |
|
7393 |
*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes |
7394 |
just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers. |
7395 |
It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you |
7396 |
can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used |
7397 |
for output. |
7398 |
|
7399 |
** Gnus changes. |
7400 |
|
7401 |
*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion. |
7402 |
|
7403 |
*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into |
7404 |
Gnus. |
7405 |
|
7406 |
*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like |
7407 |
`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection. |
7408 |
|
7409 |
*** Article washing status can be displayed in the |
7410 |
article mode line. |
7411 |
|
7412 |
*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files. |
7413 |
|
7414 |
*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID. |
7415 |
|
7416 |
(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t) |
7417 |
|
7418 |
*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files |
7419 |
are to be considered home score and adapt files. See |
7420 |
`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'. |
7421 |
|
7422 |
*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics. |
7423 |
|
7424 |
*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable. |
7425 |
|
7426 |
*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions. |
7427 |
See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'. |
7428 |
|
7429 |
*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like. |
7430 |
Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be |
7431 |
used to pick articles. |
7432 |
|
7433 |
*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to |
7434 |
another have been added. |
7435 |
|
7436 |
`M-x gnus-change-server' |
7437 |
|
7438 |
*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when |
7439 |
generating lines in buffers. |
7440 |
|
7441 |
*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with |
7442 |
`C-M-_'. |
7443 |
|
7444 |
*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'. |
7445 |
|
7446 |
*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis: |
7447 |
|
7448 |
(setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word)) |
7449 |
|
7450 |
*** Scores can be decayed. |
7451 |
|
7452 |
(setq gnus-decay-scores t) |
7453 |
|
7454 |
*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The |
7455 |
Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first. |
7456 |
|
7457 |
*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from |
7458 |
the native server. |
7459 |
|
7460 |
`M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups' |
7461 |
|
7462 |
*** A new command for reading collections of documents |
7463 |
(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `C-M-d'. |
7464 |
|
7465 |
*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped. |
7466 |
|
7467 |
*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post |
7468 |
even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting. |
7469 |
|
7470 |
*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines |
7471 |
(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added. |
7472 |
|
7473 |
Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such |
7474 |
a group. |
7475 |
|
7476 |
*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard |
7477 |
sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently. |
7478 |
|
7479 |
See the commands under the `T S' submap. |
7480 |
|
7481 |
*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently. |
7482 |
|
7483 |
See the commands under the `G P' submap. |
7484 |
|
7485 |
*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups. |
7486 |
|
7487 |
Use the `Y c' command. |
7488 |
|
7489 |
*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order. |
7490 |
|
7491 |
*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated. |
7492 |
|
7493 |
`M-x nnmail-split-history' |
7494 |
|
7495 |
*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk |
7496 |
from incoming mail before saving the mail. |
7497 |
|
7498 |
See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'. |
7499 |
|
7500 |
*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files. |
7501 |
|
7502 |
*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute |
7503 |
the following code, for instance, in your .emacs. |
7504 |
|
7505 |
(add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize) |
7506 |
|
7507 |
Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically |
7508 |
and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime |
7509 |
from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this |
7510 |
hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling |
7511 |
this issue.) |
7512 |
|
7513 |
Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems |
7514 |
automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a |
7515 |
particular news group. This can be done by: |
7516 |
|
7517 |
(gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM) |
7518 |
|
7519 |
Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree |
7520 |
of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under |
7521 |
"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding |
7522 |
system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both |
7523 |
for reading and posting). |
7524 |
|
7525 |
CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form |
7526 |
(READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM) |
7527 |
Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the |
7528 |
newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages |
7529 |
there. |
7530 |
|
7531 |
Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by |
7532 |
default. Here are some of these default settings: |
7533 |
|
7534 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7) |
7535 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312) |
7536 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312) |
7537 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5) |
7538 |
(gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr)) |
7539 |
|
7540 |
When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored; |
7541 |
the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual. |
7542 |
|
7543 |
** CC mode changes. |
7544 |
|
7545 |
*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java) |
7546 |
code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global |
7547 |
values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do |
7548 |
this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file. |
7549 |
Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is |
7550 |
loaded. |
7551 |
|
7552 |
If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, |
7553 |
Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode |
7554 |
style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers |
7555 |
share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set |
7556 |
c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you |
7557 |
must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded. |
7558 |
|
7559 |
*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name |
7560 |
of the current buffer. |
7561 |
|
7562 |
*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because |
7563 |
it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles |
7564 |
of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use. |
7565 |
|
7566 |
*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C |
7567 |
style that the Python developers like. |
7568 |
|
7569 |
*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace. |
7570 |
This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line, |
7571 |
just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line. |
7572 |
|
7573 |
** VC Changes [new] |
7574 |
|
7575 |
*** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot |
7576 |
name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current |
7577 |
directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked). |
7578 |
|
7579 |
This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common |
7580 |
master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other |
7581 |
developers. |
7582 |
|
7583 |
You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q |
7584 |
RET in a buffer visiting that file. |
7585 |
|
7586 |
*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by |
7587 |
other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a |
7588 |
writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then |
7589 |
calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it. |
7590 |
|
7591 |
*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for |
7592 |
version numbers, based on the current state of the file. |
7593 |
|
7594 |
** Calendar changes. |
7595 |
|
7596 |
*** A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or |
7597 |
subclasses of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow |
7598 |
you do this for the year of the selected date, or the |
7599 |
following/previous years. |
7600 |
|
7601 |
*** There is now support for the Baha'i calendar system. Use `pb' in |
7602 |
the *Calendar* buffer to display the current Baha'i date. The Baha'i |
7603 |
calendar, or "Badi calendar" is a system of 19 months with 19 days |
7604 |
each, and 4 intercalary days (5 during a Gregorian leap year). The |
7605 |
calendar begins May 23, 1844, with each of the months named after a |
7606 |
supposed attribute of God. |
7607 |
|
7608 |
** ps-print changes |
7609 |
|
7610 |
There are some new user variables and subgroups for customizing the page |
7611 |
layout. |
7612 |
|
7613 |
*** Headers & Footers (subgroup) |
7614 |
|
7615 |
Some printer systems print a header page and force the first page to |
7616 |
be printed on the back of the header page when using duplex. If your |
7617 |
printer system has this behavior, set variable |
7618 |
`ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' to t. |
7619 |
|
7620 |
If variable `ps-banner-page-when-duplexing' is non-nil, it prints a |
7621 |
blank page as the very first printed page. So, it behaves as if the |
7622 |
very first character of buffer (or region) were a form feed ^L (\014). |
7623 |
|
7624 |
The variable `ps-spool-config' specifies who is responsible for |
7625 |
setting duplex mode and page size. Valid values are: |
7626 |
|
7627 |
lpr-switches duplex and page size are configured by `ps-lpr-switches'. |
7628 |
Don't forget to set `ps-lpr-switches' to select duplex |
7629 |
printing for your printer. |
7630 |
|
7631 |
setpagedevice duplex and page size are configured by ps-print using the |
7632 |
setpagedevice PostScript operator. |
7633 |
|
7634 |
nil duplex and page size are configured by ps-print *not* using |
7635 |
the setpagedevice PostScript operator. |
7636 |
|
7637 |
The variable `ps-spool-tumble' specifies how the page images on |
7638 |
opposite sides of a sheet are oriented with respect to each other. If |
7639 |
`ps-spool-tumble' is nil, ps-print produces output suitable for |
7640 |
bindings on the left or right. If `ps-spool-tumble' is non-nil, |
7641 |
ps-print produces output suitable for bindings at the top or bottom. |
7642 |
This variable takes effect only if `ps-spool-duplex' is non-nil. |
7643 |
The default value is nil. |
7644 |
|
7645 |
The variable `ps-header-frame-alist' specifies a header frame |
7646 |
properties alist. Valid frame properties are: |
7647 |
|
7648 |
fore-color Specify the foreground frame color. |
7649 |
Value should be a float number between 0.0 (black |
7650 |
color) and 1.0 (white color), or a string which is a |
7651 |
color name, or a list of 3 float numbers which |
7652 |
correspond to the Red Green Blue color scale, each |
7653 |
float number between 0.0 (dark color) and 1.0 (bright |
7654 |
color). The default is 0 ("black"). |
7655 |
|
7656 |
back-color Specify the background frame color (similar to fore-color). |
7657 |
The default is 0.9 ("gray90"). |
7658 |
|
7659 |
shadow-color Specify the shadow color (similar to fore-color). |
7660 |
The default is 0 ("black"). |
7661 |
|
7662 |
border-color Specify the border color (similar to fore-color). |
7663 |
The default is 0 ("black"). |
7664 |
|
7665 |
border-width Specify the border width. |
7666 |
The default is 0.4. |
7667 |
|
7668 |
Any other property is ignored. |
7669 |
|
7670 |
Don't change this alist directly; instead use Custom, or the |
7671 |
`ps-value', `ps-get', `ps-put' and `ps-del' functions (see there for |
7672 |
documentation). |
7673 |
|
7674 |
Ps-print can also print footers. The footer variables are: |
7675 |
`ps-print-footer', `ps-footer-offset', `ps-print-footer-frame', |
7676 |
`ps-footer-font-family', `ps-footer-font-size', `ps-footer-line-pad', |
7677 |
`ps-footer-lines', `ps-left-footer', `ps-right-footer' and |
7678 |
`ps-footer-frame-alist'. These variables are similar to those |
7679 |
controlling headers. |
7680 |
|
7681 |
*** Color management (subgroup) |
7682 |
|
7683 |
If `ps-print-color-p' is non-nil, the buffer's text will be printed in |
7684 |
color. |
7685 |
|
7686 |
*** Face Management (subgroup) |
7687 |
|
7688 |
If you need to print without worrying about face background colors, |
7689 |
set the variable `ps-use-face-background' which specifies if face |
7690 |
background should be used. Valid values are: |
7691 |
|
7692 |
t always use face background color. |
7693 |
nil never use face background color. |
7694 |
(face...) list of faces whose background color will be used. |
7695 |
|
7696 |
*** N-up printing (subgroup) |
7697 |
|
7698 |
The variable `ps-n-up-printing' specifies the number of pages per |
7699 |
sheet of paper. |
7700 |
|
7701 |
The variable `ps-n-up-margin' specifies the margin in points (pt) |
7702 |
between the sheet border and the n-up printing. |
7703 |
|
7704 |
If variable `ps-n-up-border-p' is non-nil, a border is drawn around |
7705 |
each page. |
7706 |
|
7707 |
The variable `ps-n-up-filling' specifies how the page matrix is filled |
7708 |
on each sheet of paper. Following are the valid values for |
7709 |
`ps-n-up-filling' with a filling example using a 3x4 page matrix: |
7710 |
|
7711 |
`left-top' 1 2 3 4 `left-bottom' 9 10 11 12 |
7712 |
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 |
7713 |
9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 |
7714 |
|
7715 |
`right-top' 4 3 2 1 `right-bottom' 12 11 10 9 |
7716 |
8 7 6 5 8 7 6 5 |
7717 |
12 11 10 9 4 3 2 1 |
7718 |
|
7719 |
`top-left' 1 4 7 10 `bottom-left' 3 6 9 12 |
7720 |
2 5 8 11 2 5 8 11 |
7721 |
3 6 9 12 1 4 7 10 |
7722 |
|
7723 |
`top-right' 10 7 4 1 `bottom-right' 12 9 6 3 |
7724 |
11 8 5 2 11 8 5 2 |
7725 |
12 9 6 3 10 7 4 1 |
7726 |
|
7727 |
Any other value is treated as `left-top'. |
7728 |
|
7729 |
*** Zebra stripes (subgroup) |
7730 |
|
7731 |
The variable `ps-zebra-color' controls the zebra stripes grayscale or |
7732 |
RGB color. |
7733 |
|
7734 |
The variable `ps-zebra-stripe-follow' specifies how zebra stripes |
7735 |
continue on next page. Visually, valid values are (the character `+' |
7736 |
to the right of each column indicates that a line is printed): |
7737 |
|
7738 |
`nil' `follow' `full' `full-follow' |
7739 |
Current Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
7740 |
1 XXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXX + 1 XXXXXX + 1 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7741 |
2 XXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXX + 2 XXXXXX + 2 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7742 |
3 XXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXX + 3 XXXXXX + 3 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7743 |
4 + 4 + 4 + 4 + |
7744 |
5 + 5 + 5 + 5 + |
7745 |
6 + 6 + 6 + 6 + |
7746 |
7 XXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXX + 7 XXXXXX + 7 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7747 |
8 XXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXX + 8 XXXXXX + 8 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7748 |
9 XXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXX + 9 XXXXXX + 9 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7749 |
10 + 10 + |
7750 |
11 + 11 + |
7751 |
-------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
7752 |
Next Page -------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
7753 |
12 XXXXX + 12 + 10 XXXXXX + 10 + |
7754 |
13 XXXXX + 13 XXXXXXXX + 11 XXXXXX + 11 + |
7755 |
14 XXXXX + 14 XXXXXXXX + 12 XXXXXX + 12 + |
7756 |
15 + 15 XXXXXXXX + 13 + 13 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7757 |
16 + 16 + 14 + 14 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7758 |
17 + 17 + 15 + 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXX + |
7759 |
18 XXXXX + 18 + 16 XXXXXX + 16 + |
7760 |
19 XXXXX + 19 XXXXXXXX + 17 XXXXXX + 17 + |
7761 |
20 XXXXX + 20 XXXXXXXX + 18 XXXXXX + 18 + |
7762 |
21 + 21 XXXXXXXX + |
7763 |
22 + 22 + |
7764 |
-------- ----------- --------- ---------------- |
7765 |
|
7766 |
Any other value is treated as `nil'. |
7767 |
|
7768 |
|
7769 |
*** Printer management (subgroup) |
7770 |
|
7771 |
The variable `ps-printer-name-option' determines the option used by |
7772 |
some utilities to indicate the printer name; it's used only when |
7773 |
`ps-printer-name' is a non-empty string. If you're using the lpr |
7774 |
utility to print, for example, `ps-printer-name-option' should be set |
7775 |
to "-P". |
7776 |
|
7777 |
The variable `ps-manual-feed' indicates if the printer requires manual |
7778 |
paper feeding. If it's nil, automatic feeding takes place. If it's |
7779 |
non-nil, manual feeding takes place. |
7780 |
|
7781 |
The variable `ps-end-with-control-d' specifies whether C-d (\x04) |
7782 |
should be inserted at end of the generated PostScript. Non-nil means |
7783 |
do so. |
7784 |
|
7785 |
*** Page settings (subgroup) |
7786 |
|
7787 |
If variable `ps-warn-paper-type' is nil, it's *not* treated as an |
7788 |
error if the PostScript printer doesn't have a paper with the size |
7789 |
indicated by `ps-paper-type'; the default paper size will be used |
7790 |
instead. If `ps-warn-paper-type' is non-nil, an error is signaled if |
7791 |
the PostScript printer doesn't support a paper with the size indicated |
7792 |
by `ps-paper-type'. This is used when `ps-spool-config' is set to |
7793 |
`setpagedevice'. |
7794 |
|
7795 |
The variable `ps-print-upside-down' determines the orientation for |
7796 |
printing pages: nil means `normal' printing, non-nil means |
7797 |
`upside-down' printing (that is, the page is rotated by 180 degrees). |
7798 |
|
7799 |
The variable `ps-selected-pages' specifies which pages to print. If |
7800 |
it's nil, all pages are printed. If it's a list, list elements may be |
7801 |
integers specifying a single page to print, or cons cells (FROM . TO) |
7802 |
specifying to print from page FROM to TO. Invalid list elements, that |
7803 |
is integers smaller than one, or elements whose FROM is greater than |
7804 |
its TO, are ignored. |
7805 |
|
7806 |
The variable `ps-even-or-odd-pages' specifies how to print even/odd |
7807 |
pages. Valid values are: |
7808 |
|
7809 |
nil print all pages. |
7810 |
|
7811 |
`even-page' print only even pages. |
7812 |
|
7813 |
`odd-page' print only odd pages. |
7814 |
|
7815 |
`even-sheet' print only even sheets. |
7816 |
That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like |
7817 |
`even-page', but for values greater than 1, it'll |
7818 |
print only the even sheet of paper. |
7819 |
|
7820 |
`odd-sheet' print only odd sheets. |
7821 |
That is, if `ps-n-up-printing' is 1, it behaves like |
7822 |
`odd-page'; but for values greater than 1, it'll print |
7823 |
only the odd sheet of paper. |
7824 |
|
7825 |
Any other value is treated as nil. |
7826 |
|
7827 |
If you set `ps-selected-pages' (see there for documentation), pages |
7828 |
are filtered by `ps-selected-pages', and then by |
7829 |
`ps-even-or-odd-pages'. For example, if we have: |
7830 |
|
7831 |
(setq ps-selected-pages '(1 4 (6 . 10) (12 . 16) 20)) |
7832 |
|
7833 |
and we combine this with `ps-even-or-odd-pages' and |
7834 |
`ps-n-up-printing', we get: |
7835 |
|
7836 |
`ps-n-up-printing' = 1: |
7837 |
`ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED |
7838 |
nil 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 20 |
7839 |
even-page 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 |
7840 |
odd-page 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 |
7841 |
even-sheet 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20 |
7842 |
odd-sheet 1, 7, 9, 13, 15 |
7843 |
|
7844 |
`ps-n-up-printing' = 2: |
7845 |
`ps-even-or-odd-pages' PAGES PRINTED |
7846 |
nil 1/4, 6/7, 8/9, 10/12, 13/14, 15/16, 20 |
7847 |
even-page 4/6, 8/10, 12/14, 16/20 |
7848 |
odd-page 1/7, 9/13, 15 |
7849 |
even-sheet 6/7, 10/12, 15/16 |
7850 |
odd-sheet 1/4, 8/9, 13/14, 20 |
7851 |
|
7852 |
*** Miscellany (subgroup) |
7853 |
|
7854 |
The variable `ps-error-handler-message' specifies where error handler |
7855 |
messages should be sent. |
7856 |
|
7857 |
It is also possible to add a user-defined PostScript prologue code in |
7858 |
front of all generated prologue code by setting the variable |
7859 |
`ps-user-defined-prologue'. |
7860 |
|
7861 |
The variable `ps-line-number-font' specifies the font for line numbers. |
7862 |
|
7863 |
The variable `ps-line-number-font-size' specifies the font size in |
7864 |
points for line numbers. |
7865 |
|
7866 |
The variable `ps-line-number-color' specifies the color for line |
7867 |
numbers. See `ps-zebra-color' for documentation. |
7868 |
|
7869 |
The variable `ps-line-number-step' specifies the interval in which |
7870 |
line numbers are printed. For example, if `ps-line-number-step' is set |
7871 |
to 2, the printing will look like: |
7872 |
|
7873 |
1 one line |
7874 |
one line |
7875 |
3 one line |
7876 |
one line |
7877 |
5 one line |
7878 |
one line |
7879 |
... |
7880 |
|
7881 |
Valid values are: |
7882 |
|
7883 |
integer an integer specifying the interval in which line numbers are |
7884 |
printed. If it's smaller than or equal to zero, 1 |
7885 |
is used. |
7886 |
|
7887 |
`zebra' specifies that only the line number of the first line in a |
7888 |
zebra stripe is to be printed. |
7889 |
|
7890 |
Any other value is treated as `zebra'. |
7891 |
|
7892 |
The variable `ps-line-number-start' specifies the starting point in |
7893 |
the interval given by `ps-line-number-step'. For example, if |
7894 |
`ps-line-number-step' is set to 3, and `ps-line-number-start' is set to |
7895 |
3, the output will look like: |
7896 |
|
7897 |
one line |
7898 |
one line |
7899 |
3 one line |
7900 |
one line |
7901 |
one line |
7902 |
6 one line |
7903 |
one line |
7904 |
one line |
7905 |
9 one line |
7906 |
one line |
7907 |
... |
7908 |
|
7909 |
The variable `ps-postscript-code-directory' specifies the directory |
7910 |
where the PostScript prologue file used by ps-print is found. |
7911 |
|
7912 |
The variable `ps-line-spacing' determines the line spacing in points, |
7913 |
for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to |
7914 |
`ps-font-size'). |
7915 |
|
7916 |
The variable `ps-paragraph-spacing' determines the paragraph spacing, |
7917 |
in points, for ordinary text, when generating PostScript (similar to |
7918 |
`ps-font-size'). |
7919 |
|
7920 |
The variable `ps-paragraph-regexp' specifies the paragraph delimiter. |
7921 |
|
7922 |
The variable `ps-begin-cut-regexp' and `ps-end-cut-regexp' specify the |
7923 |
start and end of a region to cut out when printing. |
7924 |
|
7925 |
** hideshow changes. |
7926 |
|
7927 |
*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for |
7928 |
C++, ; for lisp). |
7929 |
|
7930 |
*** Support for java-mode added. |
7931 |
|
7932 |
*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments |
7933 |
in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set. |
7934 |
|
7935 |
*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the comments at |
7936 |
the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your |
7937 |
way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'. |
7938 |
|
7939 |
*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more |
7940 |
robust and a lot faster. |
7941 |
|
7942 |
*** A block beginning can span multiple lines. |
7943 |
|
7944 |
*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow |
7945 |
to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the |
7946 |
documentation for more details. |
7947 |
|
7948 |
** Changes in Enriched mode. |
7949 |
|
7950 |
*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is |
7951 |
filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent |
7952 |
of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in |
7953 |
use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled |
7954 |
the next time unless the fill-column is different. |
7955 |
|
7956 |
*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs |
7957 |
distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines |
7958 |
as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked |
7959 |
as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text. |
7960 |
|
7961 |
** Font Lock mode |
7962 |
|
7963 |
*** Custom support |
7964 |
|
7965 |
The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and |
7966 |
font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the |
7967 |
faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom |
7968 |
group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in |
7969 |
your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should |
7970 |
consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize. |
7971 |
|
7972 |
You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances. |
7973 |
|
7974 |
*** Maximum decoration |
7975 |
|
7976 |
Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by |
7977 |
default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level |
7978 |
of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration |
7979 |
supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil |
7980 |
to get the old behavior. |
7981 |
|
7982 |
*** New support |
7983 |
|
7984 |
Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes. |
7985 |
|
7986 |
Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes |
7987 |
support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode. |
7988 |
|
7989 |
*** Configurable support |
7990 |
|
7991 |
Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for |
7992 |
additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types, |
7993 |
c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it, |
7994 |
java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a |
7995 |
list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value |
7996 |
of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the |
7997 |
convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification. |
7998 |
|
7999 |
Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever |
8000 |
way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make |
8001 |
it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types. |
8002 |
|
8003 |
*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support |
8004 |
|
8005 |
You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own |
8006 |
highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs, |
8007 |
for any mode. |
8008 |
|
8009 |
For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put: |
8010 |
|
8011 |
(font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t))) |
8012 |
|
8013 |
in your ~/.emacs. |
8014 |
|
8015 |
*** New faces |
8016 |
|
8017 |
Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and |
8018 |
font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords, |
8019 |
distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought |
8020 |
to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces. |
8021 |
|
8022 |
*** Changes to fast-lock support mode |
8023 |
|
8024 |
The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process |
8025 |
cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the |
8026 |
same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature. |
8027 |
|
8028 |
*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode |
8029 |
|
8030 |
The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify |
8031 |
according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use |
8032 |
the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If |
8033 |
non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be |
8034 |
refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only |
8035 |
the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy |
8036 |
Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode. |
8037 |
|
8038 |
This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines. |
8039 |
For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if |
8040 |
this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly |
8041 |
refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line |
8042 |
containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use |
8043 |
the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines. |
8044 |
|
8045 |
As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed: |
8046 |
|
8047 |
Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'. |
8048 |
Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number. |
8049 |
Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the |
8050 |
new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'. |
8051 |
|
8052 |
If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those |
8053 |
settings. |
8054 |
|
8055 |
** Ada mode changes. |
8056 |
|
8057 |
*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode. |
8058 |
If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same |
8059 |
procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but |
8060 |
you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure |
8061 |
stubs. |
8062 |
|
8063 |
*** There are two new commands: |
8064 |
- `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer |
8065 |
- `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer. |
8066 |
|
8067 |
The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options', |
8068 |
`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and |
8069 |
`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands. |
8070 |
|
8071 |
*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level |
8072 |
is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs. |
8073 |
Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented. |
8074 |
|
8075 |
*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of |
8076 |
formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start, |
8077 |
places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one |
8078 |
space between a comma and the beginning of a word. |
8079 |
|
8080 |
** Scheme mode changes. |
8081 |
|
8082 |
*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp |
8083 |
mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used |
8084 |
for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables |
8085 |
with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer |
8086 |
have any effect. |
8087 |
|
8088 |
If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is |
8089 |
still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to |
8090 |
scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation |
8091 |
variables as buffer-local variables. |
8092 |
|
8093 |
*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts. |
8094 |
Use M-x dsssl-mode. |
8095 |
|
8096 |
** Changes to the emacsclient program |
8097 |
|
8098 |
*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or |
8099 |
USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID |
8100 |
associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root |
8101 |
can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user. |
8102 |
|
8103 |
*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells |
8104 |
it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the |
8105 |
buffer in Emacs. |
8106 |
|
8107 |
*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to |
8108 |
use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable |
8109 |
ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line |
8110 |
option takes precedence. |
8111 |
|
8112 |
** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area |
8113 |
constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point |
8114 |
(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only). |
8115 |
|
8116 |
** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun, |
8117 |
which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just |
8118 |
the current defun. |
8119 |
|
8120 |
** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all |
8121 |
following arguments are treated as ordinary file names. |
8122 |
|
8123 |
** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk, |
8124 |
and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if |
8125 |
necessary). |
8126 |
|
8127 |
** When you kill a buffer that visits a file, |
8128 |
if there are any registers that save positions in the file, |
8129 |
these register values no longer become completely useless. |
8130 |
If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are |
8131 |
asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes, |
8132 |
it visits the file and then goes to the same position. |
8133 |
|
8134 |
** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for |
8135 |
example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may |
8136 |
be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever |
8137 |
you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f. |
8138 |
|
8139 |
You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the |
8140 |
variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a |
8141 |
file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and |
8142 |
revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but |
8143 |
only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself. |
8144 |
|
8145 |
** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font |
8146 |
since it applies only to the current frame. |
8147 |
|
8148 |
** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the |
8149 |
file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil, |
8150 |
and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.) |
8151 |
|
8152 |
This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of |
8153 |
multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local |
8154 |
variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for |
8155 |
tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document |
8156 |
instead of just the file you are editing. |
8157 |
|
8158 |
** RefTeX mode |
8159 |
|
8160 |
RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref |
8161 |
and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of |
8162 |
different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for |
8163 |
multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and |
8164 |
turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands: |
8165 |
|
8166 |
C-c ( reftex-label |
8167 |
Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and |
8168 |
knows which kind of label is needed. |
8169 |
|
8170 |
C-c ) reftex-reference |
8171 |
Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the |
8172 |
label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}. |
8173 |
|
8174 |
C-c [ reftex-citation |
8175 |
Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX |
8176 |
database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro. |
8177 |
|
8178 |
C-c & reftex-view-crossref |
8179 |
Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point. |
8180 |
|
8181 |
C-c = reftex-toc |
8182 |
Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you |
8183 |
can quickly jump to every section. |
8184 |
|
8185 |
Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional |
8186 |
commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature. |
8187 |
Full documentation and customization examples are in the file |
8188 |
reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation: |
8189 |
C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el |
8190 |
|
8191 |
** Changes in BibTeX mode. |
8192 |
|
8193 |
*** Info documentation is now available. |
8194 |
|
8195 |
*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused |
8196 |
both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode. |
8197 |
|
8198 |
*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to |
8199 |
bibtex-user-optional-fields. |
8200 |
|
8201 |
*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote |
8202 |
(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead). |
8203 |
|
8204 |
*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete |
8205 |
entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by |
8206 |
appropriate functions. |
8207 |
|
8208 |
*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of |
8209 |
entries. They are bound by default to C-M-l and C-M-h. |
8210 |
|
8211 |
*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has |
8212 |
been cleaned. |
8213 |
|
8214 |
*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables |
8215 |
bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter. |
8216 |
|
8217 |
*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries |
8218 |
shall be delimited. |
8219 |
|
8220 |
*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of |
8221 |
bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and |
8222 |
bibtex-include-OPTkey for details. |
8223 |
|
8224 |
*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor |
8225 |
field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are |
8226 |
prefixed with `ALT'. |
8227 |
|
8228 |
*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable |
8229 |
bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many |
8230 |
formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable |
8231 |
documentation). |
8232 |
|
8233 |
*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See |
8234 |
documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions |
8235 |
for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too. |
8236 |
|
8237 |
*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if |
8238 |
comma should be inserted at end of last field. |
8239 |
|
8240 |
*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if |
8241 |
alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal |
8242 |
signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation). |
8243 |
|
8244 |
*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries. |
8245 |
|
8246 |
*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer. |
8247 |
|
8248 |
*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database |
8249 |
from alien sources. |
8250 |
|
8251 |
*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string) |
8252 |
to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in |
8253 |
crossref entries. |
8254 |
|
8255 |
*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or |
8256 |
region. |
8257 |
|
8258 |
*** Added support for imenu. |
8259 |
|
8260 |
*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead |
8261 |
of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a |
8262 |
`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g. |
8263 |
`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors. |
8264 |
|
8265 |
*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files |
8266 |
from `bibtex-string-files' are searched. |
8267 |
|
8268 |
** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative. |
8269 |
|
8270 |
** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow. |
8271 |
|
8272 |
** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the |
8273 |
functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem. |
8274 |
Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory |
8275 |
as an argument. |
8276 |
|
8277 |
When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read |
8278 |
and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed). |
8279 |
|
8280 |
** browse-url changes |
8281 |
|
8282 |
*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm), |
8283 |
Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window |
8284 |
(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic |
8285 |
non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated |
8286 |
customization variables. |
8287 |
|
8288 |
*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'. |
8289 |
|
8290 |
*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across |
8291 |
lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps |
8292 |
(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'. |
8293 |
|
8294 |
** Changes in Ediff |
8295 |
|
8296 |
*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel |
8297 |
pops up the Info file for this command. |
8298 |
|
8299 |
*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether |
8300 |
the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when |
8301 |
merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different |
8302 |
directories). |
8303 |
|
8304 |
*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare |
8305 |
and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of |
8306 |
files in the same directory. |
8307 |
|
8308 |
*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively. |
8309 |
The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug |
8310 |
related to the GNU format has now been fixed.) |
8311 |
|
8312 |
** Changes in Viper |
8313 |
|
8314 |
*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip |
8315 |
*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper- |
8316 |
instead of vip-. |
8317 |
*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states. |
8318 |
*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next |
8319 |
Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before. |
8320 |
*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states. |
8321 |
*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state. |
8322 |
*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor |
8323 |
color when Viper is in insert state. |
8324 |
*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window, |
8325 |
Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable |
8326 |
viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior. |
8327 |
|
8328 |
** Etags changes. |
8329 |
|
8330 |
*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by |
8331 |
default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average. |
8332 |
Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag |
8333 |
variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does |
8334 |
not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on. |
8335 |
|
8336 |
*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags. |
8337 |
|
8338 |
*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements" |
8339 |
constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java. |
8340 |
|
8341 |
*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are |
8342 |
recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax). |
8343 |
In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash. |
8344 |
|
8345 |
*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and |
8346 |
C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags |
8347 |
recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories, |
8348 |
methods and protocols. |
8349 |
|
8350 |
*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension |
8351 |
.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in |
8352 |
column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a |
8353 |
paragraph name. |
8354 |
|
8355 |
*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of |
8356 |
an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression |
8357 |
at least M times and as many as N times. |
8358 |
|
8359 |
** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert |
8360 |
in files has changed slightly. |
8361 |
|
8362 |
With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string, |
8363 |
time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it. |
8364 |
This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility |
8365 |
with old time-stamp-format values. |
8366 |
|
8367 |
In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign |
8368 |
(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character. |
8369 |
This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility |
8370 |
reasons. |
8371 |
|
8372 |
In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their |
8373 |
natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a |
8374 |
fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon |
8375 |
(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical |
8376 |
time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are |
8377 |
specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d". |
8378 |
|
8379 |
Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the |
8380 |
case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit |
8381 |
truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway. |
8382 |
|
8383 |
The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are |
8384 |
being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the |
8385 |
future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being |
8386 |
recommended now will continue to work then. |
8387 |
|
8388 |
See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for |
8389 |
details. |
8390 |
|
8391 |
** There are some additional major modes: |
8392 |
|
8393 |
dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files. |
8394 |
m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input. |
8395 |
meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files. |
8396 |
|
8397 |
** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you |
8398 |
copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell |
8399 |
into Emacs. |
8400 |
|
8401 |
** New Lisp packages include: |
8402 |
|
8403 |
*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops. |
8404 |
|
8405 |
*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might |
8406 |
be used for adding some indecent words to your email. |
8407 |
|
8408 |
*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor. |
8409 |
|
8410 |
*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes |
8411 |
in shell buffers. |
8412 |
|
8413 |
*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code. |
8414 |
See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer' |
8415 |
and `elint-defun'. |
8416 |
|
8417 |
*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is |
8418 |
meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary |
8419 |
ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within |
8420 |
strings or comments. |
8421 |
|
8422 |
These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an |
8423 |
abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev, |
8424 |
you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these |
8425 |
insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text |
8426 |
at these points. |
8427 |
|
8428 |
*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you |
8429 |
can visit them by short forms of their names. |
8430 |
|
8431 |
*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded |
8432 |
Emacs Lisp function at point. |
8433 |
|
8434 |
*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture. |
8435 |
|
8436 |
*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like |
8437 |
switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way. |
8438 |
|
8439 |
*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning. |
8440 |
|
8441 |
*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program. |
8442 |
|
8443 |
*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input. |
8444 |
|
8445 |
*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations |
8446 |
from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed. |
8447 |
|
8448 |
*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature. |
8449 |
You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically |
8450 |
inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its |
8451 |
original place after inserting the copy. |
8452 |
|
8453 |
*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2 |
8454 |
on the buffer. |
8455 |
|
8456 |
You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the |
8457 |
velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll |
8458 |
(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed. |
8459 |
|
8460 |
Enable mouse-drag with: |
8461 |
(global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw) |
8462 |
-or- |
8463 |
(global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag) |
8464 |
|
8465 |
*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have |
8466 |
mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail. |
8467 |
|
8468 |
*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave. |
8469 |
It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess. |
8470 |
|
8471 |
*** ogonek |
8472 |
|
8473 |
The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of |
8474 |
Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various |
8475 |
platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and |
8476 |
TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to |
8477 |
ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to |
8478 |
prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for |
8479 |
instance) and vice versa. |
8480 |
|
8481 |
To use this package load it using |
8482 |
M-x load-library [enter] ogonek |
8483 |
Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of |
8484 |
M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish |
8485 |
M-x ogonek-how -- in English |
8486 |
The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the |
8487 |
ways of customization in `.emacs'. |
8488 |
|
8489 |
*** Interface to ph. |
8490 |
|
8491 |
Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi) |
8492 |
|
8493 |
The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory |
8494 |
services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to |
8495 |
these servers. |
8496 |
|
8497 |
*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email. |
8498 |
|
8499 |
*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature. |
8500 |
You can move the virtual cursor with special commands |
8501 |
while the real cursor does not move. |
8502 |
|
8503 |
*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up |
8504 |
for visiting your favorite web sites. |
8505 |
|
8506 |
*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations, |
8507 |
so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used. |
8508 |
|
8509 |
** movemail change |
8510 |
|
8511 |
Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP |
8512 |
mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer |
8513 |
supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the |
8514 |
user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server. |
8515 |
|
8516 |
This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before. |
8517 |
|
8518 |
* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows. |
8519 |
|
8520 |
** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files. |
8521 |
|
8522 |
Emacs handles three different conventions for representing |
8523 |
end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the |
8524 |
Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific |
8525 |
file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special |
8526 |
file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention. |
8527 |
|
8528 |
To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use |
8529 |
C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different |
8530 |
coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly |
8531 |
specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with |
8532 |
LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to |
8533 |
save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos. |
8534 |
|
8535 |
* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1 |
8536 |
|
8537 |
** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in |
8538 |
Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And |
8539 |
vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in |
8540 |
Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20. |
8541 |
|
8542 |
** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed |
8543 |
to start with w32- instead of win32-. |
8544 |
|
8545 |
In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We |
8546 |
don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it |
8547 |
"win". |
8548 |
|
8549 |
** Basic Lisp changes |
8550 |
|
8551 |
*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically |
8552 |
evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant. |
8553 |
|
8554 |
*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now |
8555 |
be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program |
8556 |
or by the user. |
8557 |
|
8558 |
The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed. |
8559 |
|
8560 |
*** There are new macros `when' and `unless' |
8561 |
|
8562 |
(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...)) |
8563 |
(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...) |
8564 |
|
8565 |
*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their |
8566 |
usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of |
8567 |
its argument. |
8568 |
|
8569 |
*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties. |
8570 |
|
8571 |
*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function. |
8572 |
|
8573 |
*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors. |
8574 |
|
8575 |
*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an |
8576 |
error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives |
8577 |
include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the |
8578 |
`format' function. |
8579 |
|
8580 |
*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el |
8581 |
or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file |
8582 |
whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc. |
8583 |
|
8584 |
*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain |
8585 |
either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on |
8586 |
adding one of these suffixes. |
8587 |
|
8588 |
*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE |
8589 |
which specifies the base to use when converting an integer. |
8590 |
If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used. |
8591 |
|
8592 |
We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers, |
8593 |
because that would be much more work and does not seem useful. |
8594 |
|
8595 |
*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings. |
8596 |
|
8597 |
*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally. |
8598 |
You must load the `cl' library to define it. |
8599 |
|
8600 |
*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression |
8601 |
conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this: |
8602 |
|
8603 |
(with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...) |
8604 |
|
8605 |
BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use. |
8606 |
BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer. |
8607 |
|
8608 |
*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the |
8609 |
choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or |
8610 |
restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer' |
8611 |
works using `save-current-buffer'. |
8612 |
|
8613 |
*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and |
8614 |
write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value |
8615 |
of the last form. |
8616 |
|
8617 |
*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer, |
8618 |
which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the |
8619 |
last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string) |
8620 |
as the last form. |
8621 |
|
8622 |
*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain |
8623 |
characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the |
8624 |
matches. |
8625 |
|
8626 |
For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose"). |
8627 |
|
8628 |
*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions |
8629 |
with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string. |
8630 |
Then it returns that string. |
8631 |
|
8632 |
For example, if the current buffer name is `foo', |
8633 |
|
8634 |
(with-output-to-string |
8635 |
(princ "The buffer is ") |
8636 |
(princ (buffer-name))) |
8637 |
|
8638 |
returns "The buffer is foo". |
8639 |
|
8640 |
** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters |
8641 |
is non-nil. |
8642 |
|
8643 |
These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the |
8644 |
buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte |
8645 |
characters that occupy several buffer positions each. |
8646 |
|
8647 |
*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in |
8648 |
a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four). |
8649 |
|
8650 |
Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements; |
8651 |
character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes. |
8652 |
Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer |
8653 |
position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole |
8654 |
characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to |
8655 |
(lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))). |
8656 |
|
8657 |
ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always. |
8658 |
Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent |
8659 |
non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte |
8660 |
characters". |
8661 |
|
8662 |
The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128 |
8663 |
through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called |
8664 |
"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the |
8665 |
range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the |
8666 |
leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is. |
8667 |
|
8668 |
*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore |
8669 |
(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a |
8670 |
multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a |
8671 |
character, which may be more than one buffer position. |
8672 |
|
8673 |
This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is |
8674 |
always one buffer position, need to be changed. |
8675 |
|
8676 |
However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position. |
8677 |
|
8678 |
*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters, |
8679 |
because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters |
8680 |
have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However, |
8681 |
the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters, |
8682 |
guaranteed. |
8683 |
|
8684 |
*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is |
8685 |
between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a |
8686 |
character). |
8687 |
|
8688 |
When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS: |
8689 |
|
8690 |
0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range, |
8691 |
1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form, |
8692 |
2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form, |
8693 |
3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form, |
8694 |
4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character. |
8695 |
|
8696 |
*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses. |
8697 |
|
8698 |
*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function |
8699 |
`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be |
8700 |
more than the number of characters. |
8701 |
|
8702 |
You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing |
8703 |
it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape, |
8704 |
\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which |
8705 |
is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to |
8706 |
follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and |
8707 |
newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape. |
8708 |
|
8709 |
*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters |
8710 |
and returns a string containing those characters. |
8711 |
|
8712 |
*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string. |
8713 |
(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX |
8714 |
counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a |
8715 |
character, sref signals an error. |
8716 |
|
8717 |
*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters |
8718 |
in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the |
8719 |
string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
8720 |
|
8721 |
*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters |
8722 |
in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the |
8723 |
region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes). |
8724 |
|
8725 |
*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of |
8726 |
the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string |
8727 |
to a vector of the characters in it. |
8728 |
|
8729 |
*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents |
8730 |
of a string. You call it as follows: |
8731 |
|
8732 |
(store-substring STRING IDX OBJ) |
8733 |
|
8734 |
This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in |
8735 |
STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string. |
8736 |
This function really does alter the contents of STRING. |
8737 |
Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string, |
8738 |
it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length. |
8739 |
|
8740 |
*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR, |
8741 |
if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
8742 |
|
8743 |
*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING, |
8744 |
if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window. |
8745 |
|
8746 |
*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary, |
8747 |
to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does |
8748 |
not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string |
8749 |
which contains all or just part of the existing string.) |
8750 |
|
8751 |
(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING) |
8752 |
|
8753 |
This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN. |
8754 |
|
8755 |
The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column. |
8756 |
If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string |
8757 |
are not included in the resulting value. |
8758 |
|
8759 |
The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added |
8760 |
at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly |
8761 |
WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING |
8762 |
is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING. |
8763 |
|
8764 |
If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean |
8765 |
place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one |
8766 |
character extends across that column), then the padding character |
8767 |
PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result |
8768 |
string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at |
8769 |
column START-COLUMN. |
8770 |
|
8771 |
*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called, |
8772 |
the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not |
8773 |
necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the |
8774 |
difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the |
8775 |
changed text, before the change. |
8776 |
|
8777 |
*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character |
8778 |
sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is |
8779 |
one character set for each script, not for each language. |
8780 |
|
8781 |
**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name. |
8782 |
|
8783 |
**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names. |
8784 |
|
8785 |
**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character |
8786 |
set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.) |
8787 |
|
8788 |
**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the |
8789 |
name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values |
8790 |
which identify the character within that character set. |
8791 |
|
8792 |
**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent |
8793 |
byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the |
8794 |
opposite of split-char. |
8795 |
|
8796 |
**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets |
8797 |
of all the characters between BEG and END. |
8798 |
|
8799 |
**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets |
8800 |
of all the characters in a string. |
8801 |
|
8802 |
*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems |
8803 |
and specifying coding systems. |
8804 |
|
8805 |
**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding |
8806 |
system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list |
8807 |
of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants. |
8808 |
(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix |
8809 |
and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well |
8810 |
as what to do about code conversion.) |
8811 |
|
8812 |
**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system |
8813 |
name. It returns t if so, nil if not. |
8814 |
|
8815 |
**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
8816 |
for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
8817 |
except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name. |
8818 |
|
8819 |
Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
8820 |
which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp |
8821 |
to match against a file name. |
8822 |
|
8823 |
VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
8824 |
a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
8825 |
decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
8826 |
to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
8827 |
systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
8828 |
specifies the coding system for encoding. |
8829 |
|
8830 |
If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
8831 |
or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
8832 |
|
8833 |
**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies |
8834 |
the coding system to use for network sockets. |
8835 |
|
8836 |
Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines |
8837 |
which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be |
8838 |
either a port number or a regular expression matching some network |
8839 |
service names. |
8840 |
|
8841 |
VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or |
8842 |
a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both |
8843 |
decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent |
8844 |
to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding |
8845 |
systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr |
8846 |
specifies the coding system for encoding. |
8847 |
|
8848 |
If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system |
8849 |
or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above. |
8850 |
|
8851 |
**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use |
8852 |
for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist, |
8853 |
except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to |
8854 |
start the subprocess. |
8855 |
|
8856 |
**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding |
8857 |
systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output, |
8858 |
when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell |
8859 |
(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output |
8860 |
to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it. |
8861 |
|
8862 |
**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the |
8863 |
coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous |
8864 |
subprocess. |
8865 |
|
8866 |
It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection, |
8867 |
but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you |
8868 |
start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or |
8869 |
connection permanently or until overridden. |
8870 |
|
8871 |
The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over |
8872 |
file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and |
8873 |
network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a |
8874 |
coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil. |
8875 |
It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding |
8876 |
system for one operation at a time. |
8877 |
|
8878 |
**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from |
8879 |
files, subprocesses or network connections. |
8880 |
|
8881 |
**** The function process-coding-system tells you what |
8882 |
coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using. |
8883 |
The value is a cons cell, |
8884 |
(DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM) |
8885 |
where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from |
8886 |
the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding |
8887 |
input to the subprocess. |
8888 |
|
8889 |
**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to |
8890 |
change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess. |
8891 |
|
8892 |
** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many |
8893 |
customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility, |
8894 |
you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom. |
8895 |
|
8896 |
You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option |
8897 |
variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of |
8898 |
information (usually): the "type" which says what values are |
8899 |
legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for |
8900 |
customization. |
8901 |
|
8902 |
Thus, instead of writing |
8903 |
|
8904 |
(defvar foo-blurgoze nil |
8905 |
"*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.") |
8906 |
|
8907 |
you would now write this: |
8908 |
|
8909 |
(defcustom foo-blurgoze nil |
8910 |
"*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely." |
8911 |
:type 'boolean |
8912 |
:group foo) |
8913 |
|
8914 |
The type `boolean' means that this variable has only |
8915 |
two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values |
8916 |
describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom |
8917 |
for a description of them. |
8918 |
|
8919 |
The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option |
8920 |
should belong to. You define a new group like this: |
8921 |
|
8922 |
(defgroup ispell nil |
8923 |
"Spell checking using Ispell." |
8924 |
:group 'processes) |
8925 |
|
8926 |
The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root |
8927 |
group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself, |
8928 |
but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond |
8929 |
to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come |
8930 |
second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages. |
8931 |
|
8932 |
Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple |
8933 |
package should have just one group; a more complex package should |
8934 |
have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a |
8935 |
package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword" |
8936 |
first-level subgroups. |
8937 |
|
8938 |
** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers. |
8939 |
|
8940 |
This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a |
8941 |
separate manual that accompanies Emacs. |
8942 |
|
8943 |
** easy-mmode |
8944 |
|
8945 |
The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make |
8946 |
developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code |
8947 |
only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles, |
8948 |
predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro |
8949 |
`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also |
8950 |
`easy-mmode-define-keymap'. |
8951 |
|
8952 |
** Text property changes |
8953 |
|
8954 |
*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a |
8955 |
text property. |
8956 |
|
8957 |
*** The new functions next-char-property-change and |
8958 |
previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a |
8959 |
place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The |
8960 |
functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the |
8961 |
starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan. |
8962 |
|
8963 |
If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If |
8964 |
LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part |
8965 |
of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the |
8966 |
position of the beginning or end of the buffer. |
8967 |
|
8968 |
*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property |
8969 |
value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This |
8970 |
is an alternative to using the keymap itself. |
8971 |
|
8972 |
** Changes in invisibility features |
8973 |
|
8974 |
*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are |
8975 |
hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match |
8976 |
is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay |
8977 |
should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that |
8978 |
would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should |
8979 |
make the overlay visible. |
8980 |
|
8981 |
During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the |
8982 |
invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are |
8983 |
needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary |
8984 |
which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is |
8985 |
the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and |
8986 |
t when it should hide it. |
8987 |
|
8988 |
*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec |
8989 |
|
8990 |
Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the |
8991 |
invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol) |
8992 |
and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol. |
8993 |
Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to |
8994 |
manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'. |
8995 |
Here is an example of how to do this: |
8996 |
|
8997 |
;; If we want to display an ellipsis: |
8998 |
(add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
8999 |
;; If you don't want ellipsis: |
9000 |
(add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
9001 |
|
9002 |
... |
9003 |
(overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol) |
9004 |
|
9005 |
... |
9006 |
;; When done with the overlays: |
9007 |
(remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t)) |
9008 |
;; Or respectively: |
9009 |
(remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol) |
9010 |
|
9011 |
** Changes in syntax parsing. |
9012 |
|
9013 |
*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as |
9014 |
`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now |
9015 |
obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable |
9016 |
`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil. |
9017 |
|
9018 |
If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior |
9019 |
is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always |
9020 |
used to determine the syntax of the character at the position. |
9021 |
|
9022 |
When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a |
9023 |
character in the buffer is calculated thus: |
9024 |
|
9025 |
a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character |
9026 |
is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type; |
9027 |
|
9028 |
Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid |
9029 |
syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e., |
9030 |
a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR). |
9031 |
|
9032 |
b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property |
9033 |
is a syntax table, this syntax table is used |
9034 |
(instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to |
9035 |
determine the syntax type of the character. |
9036 |
|
9037 |
c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table |
9038 |
of the current buffer. |
9039 |
|
9040 |
*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the |
9041 |
value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as |
9042 |
for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions. |
9043 |
|
9044 |
*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14 |
9045 |
and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended |
9046 |
only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A |
9047 |
character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by |
9048 |
another character with the same code (unless quoted). |
9049 |
|
9050 |
These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table' |
9051 |
text property. |
9052 |
|
9053 |
*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth |
9054 |
arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start |
9055 |
of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string. |
9056 |
|
9057 |
*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp' |
9058 |
(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth |
9059 |
element: the character address of the start of last comment or string; |
9060 |
nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the |
9061 |
string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code. |
9062 |
|
9063 |
*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete |
9064 |
syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports |
9065 |
`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'. |
9066 |
|
9067 |
** Changes in face features |
9068 |
|
9069 |
*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even |
9070 |
if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces. |
9071 |
|
9072 |
*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string |
9073 |
of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one). |
9074 |
|
9075 |
*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold. |
9076 |
set-face-bold-p sets that flag. |
9077 |
|
9078 |
*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic. |
9079 |
set-face-italic-p sets that flag. |
9080 |
|
9081 |
*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text |
9082 |
by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME) |
9083 |
and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in |
9084 |
the `face' property (either the character's text property or an |
9085 |
overlay property). |
9086 |
|
9087 |
This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use |
9088 |
arbitrary colors in a Lisp package. |
9089 |
|
9090 |
** Changes in file-handling functions |
9091 |
|
9092 |
*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant |
9093 |
directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words, |
9094 |
they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion |
9095 |
is now done only in substitute-in-file-name. |
9096 |
|
9097 |
This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name |
9098 |
begins with ~. |
9099 |
|
9100 |
*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file, |
9101 |
it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error. |
9102 |
|
9103 |
*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if |
9104 |
the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers. |
9105 |
|
9106 |
*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file, |
9107 |
as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil. |
9108 |
|
9109 |
*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses |
9110 |
character code conversion as well as other things. |
9111 |
|
9112 |
Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names |
9113 |
(formerly it did not). |
9114 |
|
9115 |
*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR |
9116 |
environment variable to decide which directory to put them in. |
9117 |
|
9118 |
*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps |
9119 |
instead of constant strings. |
9120 |
|
9121 |
*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used |
9122 |
to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of |
9123 |
any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through. |
9124 |
|
9125 |
substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially, |
9126 |
in the same way as before. |
9127 |
|
9128 |
*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now. |
9129 |
The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings |
9130 |
which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion. |
9131 |
|
9132 |
*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an |
9133 |
error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing |
9134 |
else, and returns nil. |
9135 |
|
9136 |
*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified |
9137 |
directory cannot be listed. |
9138 |
|
9139 |
** Changes in minibuffer input |
9140 |
|
9141 |
*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string |
9142 |
read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an |
9143 |
additional argument which specifies the default value. If this |
9144 |
argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two |
9145 |
ways: |
9146 |
|
9147 |
It is returned if the user enters empty input. |
9148 |
It is available through the history command M-n. |
9149 |
|
9150 |
*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer, |
9151 |
read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional |
9152 |
argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the |
9153 |
minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of |
9154 |
enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer. |
9155 |
|
9156 |
In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an |
9157 |
argument in this way. |
9158 |
|
9159 |
*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties |
9160 |
from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable |
9161 |
minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil. |
9162 |
|
9163 |
** Echo area features |
9164 |
|
9165 |
*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook |
9166 |
echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the |
9167 |
minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active |
9168 |
after the echo area is cleared. |
9169 |
|
9170 |
*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed |
9171 |
in the echo area, or nil if there is none. |
9172 |
|
9173 |
** Keyboard input features |
9174 |
|
9175 |
*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was |
9176 |
set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started. |
9177 |
|
9178 |
*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events |
9179 |
received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated |
9180 |
by keyboard macros. |
9181 |
|
9182 |
** Frame-related changes |
9183 |
|
9184 |
*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before |
9185 |
creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal |
9186 |
hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg. |
9187 |
|
9188 |
*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time |
9189 |
the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration |
9190 |
has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run. |
9191 |
|
9192 |
*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently |
9193 |
selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the |
9194 |
value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed |
9195 |
in the selected frame. |
9196 |
|
9197 |
*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars |
9198 |
is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies |
9199 |
which side of the window to put the scroll bars on. |
9200 |
|
9201 |
** X Windows features |
9202 |
|
9203 |
*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding |
9204 |
x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of |
9205 |
x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs. |
9206 |
|
9207 |
*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work. |
9208 |
The menu displays the current status of the box or button. |
9209 |
|
9210 |
*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument |
9211 |
MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return. |
9212 |
A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster. |
9213 |
|
9214 |
If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern, |
9215 |
it is good to supply 1 for this argument. |
9216 |
|
9217 |
** Subprocess features |
9218 |
|
9219 |
*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter |
9220 |
functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this |
9221 |
automatically. |
9222 |
|
9223 |
*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command |
9224 |
and returns the output from the command as a string. |
9225 |
|
9226 |
*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process, |
9227 |
and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection. |
9228 |
|
9229 |
** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook |
9230 |
does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before. |
9231 |
|
9232 |
** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes |
9233 |
at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it |
9234 |
goes after the other menu items. |
9235 |
|
9236 |
** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area |
9237 |
of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls |
9238 |
around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks |
9239 |
are in use. |
9240 |
|
9241 |
The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a |
9242 |
series of several changes--if that seems safe. |
9243 |
|
9244 |
Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and |
9245 |
after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls |
9246 |
form. |
9247 |
|
9248 |
** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION |
9249 |
is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense, |
9250 |
but its hook is still run. |
9251 |
|
9252 |
** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it) |
9253 |
for errors that are handled by condition-case. |
9254 |
|
9255 |
If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called |
9256 |
regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is |
9257 |
useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case. |
9258 |
|
9259 |
This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that |
9260 |
are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process |
9261 |
filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't |
9262 |
warned. |
9263 |
|
9264 |
** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own |
9265 |
way for Emacs to "ring the bell". |
9266 |
|
9267 |
** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at |
9268 |
integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for |
9269 |
functions like display-time. |
9270 |
|
9271 |
** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file |
9272 |
name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before. |
9273 |
|
9274 |
** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that |
9275 |
can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode |
9276 |
is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit. |
9277 |
|
9278 |
** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code |
9279 |
if there is an error in compilation. |
9280 |
|
9281 |
** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and |
9282 |
switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional |
9283 |
argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil, |
9284 |
they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list. |
9285 |
|
9286 |
** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty, |
9287 |
Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing |
9288 |
the *scratch* buffer. |
9289 |
|
9290 |
** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string. |
9291 |
The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used |
9292 |
where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important, |
9293 |
e.g., in Font Lock mode. |
9294 |
|
9295 |
** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer, |
9296 |
and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window. |
9297 |
It starts at 0 when the buffer is created. |
9298 |
|
9299 |
** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message |
9300 |
using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the |
9301 |
variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window |
9302 |
and compose-mail-other-frame. |
9303 |
|
9304 |
** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which |
9305 |
can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The |
9306 |
full name of the specified user will be returned. |
9307 |
|
9308 |
** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort |
9309 |
of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding |
9310 |
where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found |
9311 |
in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q |
9312 |
option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization |
9313 |
files at all. |
9314 |
|
9315 |
** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width |
9316 |
and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field |
9317 |
width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start |
9318 |
the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros. |
9319 |
|
9320 |
For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the |
9321 |
minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad |
9322 |
with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that |
9323 |
is how %S normally pads to two positions. |
9324 |
|
9325 |
** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url. |
9326 |
|
9327 |
** imenu.el changes. |
9328 |
|
9329 |
You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an |
9330 |
item from menu created by imenu. |
9331 |
|
9332 |
An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the |
9333 |
#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we |
9334 |
select one of those items. |
9335 |
|
9336 |
* For older news, see the file ONEWS |
9337 |
|
9338 |
---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
9339 |
Copyright information: |
9340 |
|
9341 |
Copyright (C) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
9342 |
|
9343 |
Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies |
9344 |
of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the |
9345 |
copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved, |
9346 |
thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn. |
9347 |
|
9348 |
Permission is granted to distribute modified versions |
9349 |
of this document, or of portions of it, |
9350 |
under the above conditions, provided also that they |
9351 |
carry prominent notices stating who last changed them. |
9352 |
|
9353 |
Local variables: |
9354 |
mode: outline |
9355 |
paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$" |
9356 |
end: |